Power

edby

CSIAnal
yti
calEngi
ne
 Composite Column
Design Manual
AISC 360-22
For

ISO ETA010424M75 Rev. 0 February 2024

Proudly developed in the United States of America
 Copyright

Copyright  Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-2024

All rights reserved.

The CSI Logo®, SAP2000®, ETABS®, and SAFE® are registered trademarks of Computers and Structures,
Inc. Watch & LearnTM is a trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.

The computer programs SAP2000®, ETABS®, SAFE® and all associated documentation are proprietary
and copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers and Structures, Inc.
Unlicensed use of these programs or reproduction of documentation in any form, without prior written
authorization from Computers and Structures, Inc., is explicitly prohibited.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a
database or retrieval system, without the prior explicit written permission of the publisher.

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers and Structures, Inc.

http://www.csiamerica.com/

[email protected] (for general information)

[email protected] (for technical support)
 DISCLAIMER

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING OF THIS SOFTWARE. HOWEVER, THE USER
ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS ON THE ACCURACY
OR THE RELIABILITY OF THIS PRODUCT.

THIS PRODUCT IS A PRACTICAL AND POWERFUL TOOL FOR STRUCTURAL

DESIGN. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE BASIC
ASSUMPTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE MODELING, ANALYSIS, AND DESIGN
ALGORITHMS AND COMPENSATE FOR THE ASPECTS THAT ARE NOT
ADDRESSED.

THE INFORMATION PRODUCED BY THE SOFTWARE MUST BE CHECKED BY

A QUALIFIED AND EXPERIENCED ENGINEER. THE ENGINEER MUST
INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS AND TAKE PROFESSIONAL
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INFORMATION THAT IS USED.
 Contents

1 Introduction 3

1.1 Load Combinations and Notional Loads 3

1.2 Stress Check 4

1.3 Direct Analysis Method vs. Effective Length Method 4

1.3.1 Effective Length Method 5
1.3.2 Direct Analysis Method 5

1.4 User Options 5

1.5 Non-Automated Items in Composite Column Design 6

2 Design Prerequisites 7

2.1 Check and Design Capability 7

2.2 Design and Check Stations 8

2.3 Demand/Capacity Ratios 8

2.4 Design Load Combinations 8

2.5 Second Order P-Delta Effects 9

2.6 Analysis Methods 10

2.7 Notional Load Patterns 13

2.8 Member Unsupported Lengths 14

2.9 Effects of Breaking a Member into Multiple Elements 15

2.10 Effective Length Factor (K) 16

i
 2.11 Choice of Units 19

3 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22 20

3.1 Notations 20

3.2 Design Loading Combinations 22

3.3 Calculation of Factored Forces and Moments 25

3.4 Design of Composite Column 27

3.5 Filled Composite Sections 28

3.5.1 Classification for Local Buckling 28
3.5.2 Calculation of Nominal Strengths 31
3.5.3 Nominal Flexure Strength 33
3.5.4 Nominal Shear Strength 41
3.5.5 Nominal Torsional Strength 43

3.6 Encased Composite Sections 44

3.6.1 Classification for Local Buckling 44
3.6.2 Calculation of Nominal Strengths 44
3.6.3 Nominal Flexure Strength 46
3.6.4 Nominal Shear Strength 54

3.7 Design of Members for Combined Forces 58

Appendix A. P-Delta Effects 63

Appendix B. Concrete Filled Pipe 66

Appendix C. Interactive Column Design 72

Appendix D. Analysis Sections vs Design Sections 73

Bibliography 74

ii
 1 Introduction

The design/check of composite columns is seamlessly integrated within the program. Initiation
of the design process, along with control of various design parameters, is accomplished using the
Design menu. Automated design at the object level is available for any one of a number of user-
selected design codes, as long as the structures have first been modeled and analyzed by the
program. Model and analysis data, such as material properties and member forces, are recovered
directly from the model database and are used in the design process in accordance with the user
defined or default design settings. As with all design applications, the user should carefully review
all of the user options and default settings to ensure that the design process is consistent with the
user’s expectations. The AISC 360-22 composite column design options include the use of the
Direct Analysis Method. The software is well suited to make use of the Direct Analysis Method
because it can capture the second-order 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ effects, provided the user specifies that
a nonlinear 𝑃𝑃 − Δ analysis is performed.

Chapter 2 addresses prerequisites related to modeling and analysis for a successful design in
accordance with “AISC 360-22.” Chapter 3 provides detailed descriptions of the specific
requirements as implemented in “AISC 360-22.” The program does not check any of the
specific requirements for seismic design as required by the specification in the ANSI/AISC
341-22 code. The appendices provide details on various topics referenced in this manual. The
user also should review the AISC Direct Analysis Method Practical Guide.

1.1 Load Combinations and Notional Loads

The design is based on a set of user specified loading combinations. However, the program
provides default load combinations for each supported design code. If the default load
combinations are acceptable, no definition of additional load combinations is required. The Direct
Analysis Method requires that a notional load, 𝑁𝑁 = 0.002𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 , where 𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 is the gravity load acting
at level 𝑖𝑖, be applied to account for the destabilizing effects associated with the initial
imperfections and other conditions that may induce sway not explicitly modeled in the structure.
The user must be aware that notional loads must be defined and assigned by the user. Currently,
the software creates design combinations that include notional loads and gravity loads only. If the
user needs notional loads that include combinations containing lateral loads, the user must define
such combinations manually.

Introduction 3
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Introduction

1.2 Stress Check

Composite column design/check consists of calculating the flexural, axial, and shear forces or
stresses at several locations along the length of a member and then comparing those calculated
values with acceptable limits. That comparison produces a demand/capacity ratio, which typically
should not exceed a value of one if code requirements are to be satisfied. The program follows
the same review procedures whether it is checking a user specified shape or a shape selected by
the program from a predefined list. The program also checks the requirements for the beam-
column capacity ratio, checks the capacity of the panel zone, and calculates the doubler plate and
continuity plate thickness, if needed. The program does not do the connection design. However,
it calculates the design basis forces for connection design.

Program output can be presented graphically on the model, in tables for both input and output
data, or in calculation sheets prepared for each member. For each presentation method, the output
is in a format that allows the engineer to quickly study the stress conditions that exist in the
structure, and in the event the member is not adequate, aid the engineer in taking appropriate
remedial measures, including altering the design member without re-running the entire analysis.

The program supports a wide range of composite column design codes, including many national
building codes. This manual is dedicated to the use of the menu option “AISC 360-22.” This
option covers the “ANSI/AISC 360-22 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” (AISC
2022a, b). It does not cover the “ANSI/AISC 341-22 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings” (AISC 2022c) codes.

The implementation covers loading and load combinations from “ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures” (ASCE 2022). Both LRFD (Load and
Resistance Factor Design) and ASD (Allowable Strength Design) codes are included in this
implementation under the same AISC 360-22 code name. The LRFD and ASD are available as
two options in the program’s preferences feature. In both cases, the strengths are calculated in the
nominal levels. The phi (LRFD) and Omega (ADS) factors are applied during calculation of
demand/capacity ratios only. The design codes supported under “AISC 360-22” are written in
kip-inch units. All the associated equations and requirements have been implemented in the
program in kip-in units. The program has been enabled with unit conversion capability. This
allows the users to enjoy the flexibility of choosing any set of consistent units during creating and
editing models, exporting and importing model components, and reviewing design results.

1.3 Direct Analysis Method vs. Effective Length Method

The Direct Analysis Method described in AISC 360-22, Chapter C, is substantially different from
previous design methods supported by AISC. The user should be knowledgeable about the Design
for Stability (Chapter C) requirements and the requirements pertaining to consideration of the
geometric imperfections, stiffness reductions, and the 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ effects. Several methods
for consideration of the second-order effects are available to the users. Each of these are described
in detail in a subsequent section (see User Options in this chapter) and in the Composite Column
Design Preferences, Appendix B of this manual. Alternatively, if the user desires to use a more

Stress Check 4
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Introduction

traditional design method, the Effective Length method can be specified using the Design
Preferences.

1.3.1 Effective Length Method

For structures exhibiting small second-order effects, the effective length method may be suitable.
The effective length approach relies on two main assumptions, namely, that the structural
response is elastic and that all columns buckle simultaneously. The effective length method also
relies on a calibrated approach to account for the differences between the actual member response
and the 2nd-order elastic analysis results. The calibration is necessary because the 2nd-order
elastic analysis does not account for the effects of distributed yielding and geometric
imperfections. Since the interaction equations used in the effective length approach rely on the
calibration corresponding to a 2nd-order elastic analysis of an idealized structure, the results are
not likely representative of the actual behavior of the structure. However, the results are generally
conservative. In the AISC 360-22 code, the effective length method is allowed provided the
member demands are determined using a second-order analysis (either explicit or by amplified
first-order analysis) and notional loads are included in all gravity load combinations (AISC
Appendix 7). 𝐾𝐾-factors must be calculated to account for buckling (except for braced frames or
where ∆2 ⁄∆1 ≤ 1.5, 𝐾𝐾 = 1.0) (AISC App. 7.2).

1.3.2 Direct Analysis Method

The Direct Analysis Method is expected to more accurately determine the internal forces of the
structure, provided care is used in the selection of the appropriate methods used to determine the
second-order effects, notional load effects and appropriate stiffness reduction factors as defined
in AISC C2. Additionally, the Direct Analysis Method does not use an effective length factor
other than 𝐾𝐾 = 1.0. The rational behind the use of 𝐾𝐾 = 1.0 is that proper consideration of the
second-order effects (𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ), geometric imperfections (using notional loads) and
inelastic effects (applying stiffness reductions) better accounts for the stability effects of a
structure than the earlier Effective Length methods.

1.4 User Options

In addition to offering ASD and LRFD design, the Preferences on the Design menu provide seven
analysis methods for design, as follows:

• General Second Order Elastic Analysis (AISC C1.2)

• Second Order Analysis by Amplified First Order Analysis (AISC C1.2, App. 7.2, App.
8.2)
• Limited First Order Elastic Analysis (AISC C1.2, App. 7.3)
• Direct Analysis Method with General Second Order Analysis and Variable Factor
Stiffness Reduction (AISC C1, C2)
• Direct Analysis Method with General Second Order Analysis and Fixed Factor Stiffness
Reduction (AISC C1, C2)
• Direct Analysis Method with Amplified First Order Analysis and Variable Factor

User Options 5
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Introduction

Stiffness Reduction (AISC C1, C2)

• Direct Analysis Method with Amplified First Order Analysis and Fixed Factor Stiffness
Reduction (AISC C1, C2)

These options are explained in greater detail in Chapter 2. The first three options make use of the
effective length approach to determine the effective length factors, K. The four options available
for the Direct Design Method differ in the use of a variable or fixed stiffness reduction factor and
the method used to capture the second-order effects. All four Direct Analysis Methods options
use an effective length factor, 𝐾𝐾 = 1.0.

1.5 Non-Automated Items in Composite Column Design

Currently, the software does not automate the following:

• Notional loads combinations that include lateral wind and quake loads.
• The validity of the analysis method. The user must verify the suitability of the specified
analysis method used under the Composite Column Preferences Options described in the
preceding sections. The AISC code requires, for example, that the Direct Analysis
Method be used when a ratio of the second order displacements to the first order
displacements exceeds 1.5 (AISC C1.2, App. 7.2.1(2), App. 7.3.1(2)). This check
currently must be performed by the user.
• 𝑃𝑃 − Δ analysis. Since many different codes are supported by the software and not all
require a 𝑃𝑃 − Δ analysis, the user must specify that a 𝑃𝑃 − Δ analysis be performed during
the analysis phase so that the proper member forces are available for use in the design
phase. See the AISC Direct Analysis Method Practical Guide for additional information.

Non-Automated Items in Composite Column Design 6

 2 Design Prerequisites

This chapter provides an overview of the basic assumptions, design preconditions, and some of
the design parameters that affect the design of composite columns.

For referring to pertinent sections of the corresponding code, a unique prefix is assigned for each
code.

• Reference to the ANSI/AISC 360-22 code is identified with the prefix “AISC.”
• Reference to the ANSI/AISC 341-22 code is identified with the prefix “AISC SEISMIC”
or sometimes “SEISMIC” only.
• Reference to the ASCE/SEI 7-22 code is identified with the prefix “ASCE.”
• Reference to the IBC 2015 code is identified with the prefix “IBC.”

2.1 Check and Design Capability

The program has the ability to check adequacy of a section (shape) in accordance with the
requirements of the selected design code. Also, the program can automatically choose (i.e.,
design) the optimal (i.e., least weight) sections from a predefined list that satisfies the design
requirements.

To check the adequacy of a section, the program checks the demand/capacity (D/C) ratios at a
predefined number of stations for each design load combination. It calculates the envelope of the
D/C ratios. It also checks the other requirements on a pass or fail basis. If the capacity ratio
remains less than or equal to the D/C ratio limit, which is a number close to 1.0, and if the section
passes all of the special requirements, the section is considered to be adequate, else the section is
considered to be failed. The D/C ratio limit is taken as 0.95 by default. However, this value can
be overwritten in the Preferences (see Chapter 3).

To choose (design) the optional section from a predefined list, the program first orders the list of
sections in increasing order of weight per unit length. Then it starts checking each section from
the ordered list, starting with the one with least weight. The procedure of checking each section
in this list is exactly the same as described in the preceding paragraph. The program will evaluate
each section in the list until it finds the least weight section that passes the code checks. If no
section in the list is acceptable, the program will use the heaviest section but flag it as being
overstressed.

Check and Design Capability 7

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

To check the adequacy of an individual section, the user must assign the section using the Assign
menu. In that case, both the analysis and design sections will be changed (see Appendix D).

2.2 Design and Check Stations

For each design combination, composite column members are checked at a number of locations
(stations) along the length of the object. The stations are located at equally spaced segments along
the clear length of the object. By default, at least three stations will be located in a column or
brace member. The user can overwrite the number of stations in an object before the analysis is
run and refine the design along the length of a member by requesting more stations. Refer to the
program Help for more information about specifying the number of stations in an object.

2.3 Demand/Capacity Ratios

Determination of the controlling demand/capacity (D/C) ratios for each composite column
member indicates the acceptability of the member for the given loading conditions. The steps for
calculating the D/C ratios are as follows:

• The factored forces are calculated for axial, flexural, and shear at each defined station for
each design combination. The bending moments are calculated about the principal axes.
For Filled Box, Filled Pipe, and Encased-I Concrete Sections, the principal axes coincide
with the geometric axes.
• The nominal strengths are calculated for compression, tension, bending and shear based
on the equations provided later in this manual. For flexure, the nominal strengths are
calculated based on the principal axes of bending. For the Filled Box, Filled Pipe, and
Encased-I Concrete Sections, the principal axes coincide with their geometric axes.
• The nominal strength for shear is calculated along the geometric axes for all sections. For
Filled Box, Filled Pipe, and Encased-I Concrete Sections, the principal axes coincide with
their geometric axes.
• Factored forces are compared to nominal strengths to determine D/C ratios. In either case,
design codes typically require that the ratios not exceed a value of one. A capacity ratio
greater than one indicates a member that has exceeded a limit state.

2.4 Design Load Combinations

The design load combinations are the various combinations of the prescribed load cases for which
the structure needs to be checked. The program creates a number of default design load
combinations for composite column design. Users can add their own design combinations as well
as modify or delete the program default design load combinations. An unlimited number of design
load combinations can be specified.

To define a design load combination, simply specify one or more load cases, each with its own
scale factor. The scale factors are applied to the forces and moments from the load cases to form
the factored design forces and moments for each design load combination.

Design and Check Stations 8

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

For normal loading conditions involving static dead load (DL), live load (LL), wind load (WL),
earthquake load (EL), notional load (NL), and dynamic response spectrum load (EL), the program
has built-in default design combinations for the design code. These are based on the code
recommendations.

The default design combinations assume all load cases declared as dead or live to be additive.
However, each load case declared as wind, earthquake, or response spectrum cases is assumed to
be non-additive with other loads and produces multiple lateral combinations. Also, static wind,
earthquake and notional load responses produce separate design combinations with the sense
(positive or negative) reversed. The notional load patterns are added to load combinations
involving gravity loads only.

For other loading conditions involving moving load, time history, pattern live load, separate
consideration of roof live load, snow load, and the like, the user must define the design load
combinations in lieu of or in addition to the default design load combinations. If notional loads
are to be combined with other load combinations involving wind or earthquake loads, the design
load combinations need to be defined in lieu of or in addition to the default design load
combinations.

For multi-valued design combinations, such as those involving response spectrum, time history,
moving loads and envelopes, where any correspondence between forces is lost, the program
automatically produces sub-combinations using the maxima/minima values of the interacting
forces. Separate combinations with negative factors for response spectrum load cases are not
required because the program automatically takes the minima to be the negative of the maxima
response when preparing the sub-combinations described previously.

The program allows live load reduction factors to be applied to the member forces of the reducible
live load case on a member-by-member basis to reduce the contribution of the live load to the
factored responses.

2.5 Second Order P-Delta Effects

The AISC 360-22 composite column design options include the use of the Direct Analysis
Method. The software is well suited to make use of the Direct Analysis Method because each
program can capture the second-order 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ effects, provided the user specifies that a
nonlinear P-Delta analysis be performed.

Second Order P-Delta Effects 9

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

∆
Original position of frame
element shown by vertical
line δ
Final deflected position of the
frame element that includes the
global lateral translation, ∆, and
the local deformation of the
Position of frame element
element, δ
as a result of global lateral
translation, ∆, shown by
dashed line
δ

Figure 2-1: System Sway and Element Order Effects

For a detailed discussion of the program capabilities and limitations, see Appendix A.

2.6 Analysis Methods

The code requires that stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of the
elements. Any method of analysis that considers the influence of second order effects of 𝑃𝑃 − Δ
and 𝑃𝑃 − δ, geometric imperfections, out-of-plumbness, and member stiffness reduction due to
residual stresses are permitted by the code. The effects of geometric imperfection and out-of-
plumbness generally are captured by the use of notional loads. The effect of axial, shear and
flexural deformations and the effects of residual stresses on the member stiffness reduction has
been considered in a specialized method called “Direct Analysis Method.” This method can come
in different incarnations (formats) according to the choice of the engineer as allowed in the code.

The program offers the user seven analysis options for design:

Direct Analysis Method

• General Second Order Elastic Analysis with

𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 variable (user option 1, Default)

𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 fixed (user option 2)
• Amplified First Order Elastic Analysis with

𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 variable (user option 3)

𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 fixed (user option 4)

Analysis Methods 10
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

Equivalent Length Method

• General Second Order Elastic Analysis

(AISC C1.2, App. 7.2) (user option 5)

• Amplified First Order Elastic Analysis

(AISC C1.2, App. 8.2) (user option 6)

Limited First-Order Analysis (AISC C1.2, App. 7.3) (user option 7)
A summary of all of the user options and requirements is provided in Table 2-1. The main
difference between the various options concerns the use of the Direct Analysis Method or the
Equivalent Length Method. Within each of the categories, the user can choose the method to
calculate the second-order effects, namely, by a General Second Order Analysis or an Amplified
First-Order Analysis. When the amplified first-order analysis is used, the force amplification
factors, 𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 (AISC App. 8.2), are needed. The 𝐵𝐵1 factor is calculated by the program;
however, the 𝐵𝐵2 factor is not. The user will need to provide this value using the overwrite options
that are described in Appendix B.

When the user selects one of the options available under the Direct Analysis Method, the user
must further choose how the stiffness reduction factors for 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 are to be considered. For
options 1 and 3, Table 2-1, the stiffness reduction factors (𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 ) are variable because they are
functions of the axial force in the members, while for methods 2 and 4, the stiffness reduction
factors are fixed (0.8), and not a function of axial force. If the user desires, the stiffness reduction
factors (𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 ) can be overwritten. When options 2 and 4 are used, a higher notional load coefficient
(0.003) must be used compared to methods 1 and 3 for which the notional load coefficient is
0.002. Also, all the direct analysis methods (methods 1 through 4) allow use of 𝐾𝐾-factors for sway
condition (𝐾𝐾2 ) to be equal to 1, which is a drastic simplification over the other effective length
method.

The AISC requirements to include notional loads are also summarized in Table 2-1. The notional
load coefficients (AISC C2.2b) are summarized as well. The program automates creation of
notional load combinations for all gravity loads but does not automate the creation of notional
load combinations that include lateral wind or seismic loads. Combinations for notional loads
with lateral loads are required for the Direct Analysis Method when the ∆2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ⁄∆1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 exceeds 1.7
(AISC E2.2b(4)). Additionally, combinations for notional loads with lateral loads are required if
the Limited First Order Analysis, option 7, is used (AISC App. 7.3.2).

The Limited First Order Analysis, option 7, does not include the secondary 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ
effects. This method has very limited applicability and might be appropriate only when the axial
forces in the columns are very small compared to their Euler buckling capacities.

When using the LRFD provision, the actual load combinations are used for second order 𝑃𝑃 − Δ
effects. When using the ASD provision, the load combinations are first amplified by 1.6 before
the P-∆ analysis and then the results are reduced by a factor of (1⁄1.6) (AISC C2.1(4)).

Analysis Methods 11
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

Table 2-1: The Essentials and Limitations of the Design Analysis Methods
Direct Analysis Method
Limitation or
Option Variable Essentials of the Method
Applicability
2nd Order Analysis
Reduced stiffness
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃
⎧1.0 for 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 0.5
⎪ 𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦
Variable 𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 =
Factor Stiffness No limitation ⎨ 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟
⎪4 � 𝑃𝑃 � �1 − 𝑃𝑃 � for 𝑃𝑃 ≥ 0.5
Reduction ⎩ 𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦
𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 not used
𝐾𝐾2 = 1 (used for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 )
𝛥𝛥
Notional load with all combos, except for 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ≤ 1.7 for
General Second 𝛥𝛥1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
which notional load with gravity combos only
Order Analysis Notional load coefficient = 0.002 (typically)
2nd Order Analysis
Reduced stiffness
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
Fixed Factor 𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 = 1.0
Stiffness No limitation 𝐵𝐵1 B1 and 𝐵𝐵2 not used
Reduction 𝐾𝐾2 = 1 (used for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 )
𝛥𝛥
Notional load with all combos, except for 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ≤ 1.7 for
𝛥𝛥1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
which notional load with gravity combos only
Notional load coefficient = 0.003 (typically)
1st Order Analysis
Reduced Stiffness
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃
⎧1.0 for 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 0.5
⎪ 𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦
Amplified First Variable 𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 =
⎨ 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟
Order Analysis Factor Stiffness No limitation ⎪4 � 𝑃𝑃 � �1 − 𝑃𝑃 � for 𝑃𝑃 ≥ 0.5
⎩ 𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦
Reduction 𝐾𝐾1 = 1 for 𝐵𝐵1
𝐾𝐾2 = 1 for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 and 𝐵𝐵2
𝛥𝛥
Notional load with all combos, except for 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ≤ 1.7 for
𝛥𝛥1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
which notional load with gravity combos only
Notional load coefficient = 0.002 (typically)
2nd Order Analysis
Reduced stiffness
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
Fixed Factor 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ∗= 0.8𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
Amplified First 𝜏𝜏𝑏𝑏 = 1.0
Stiffness No limitation
Order Analysis 𝐾𝐾2 = 1 (used for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 )
Reduction 𝛥𝛥
Notional load with all combos, except for 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ≤ 1.7 for
𝛥𝛥1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
which notional load with gravity combos only
Notional load coefficient = 0.003 (typically)
Effective Length Method
Limitation or
Option Essentials of the Method
Applicability
𝛥𝛥2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 2nd Order Analysis
≤ 1.5
𝛥𝛥1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 Unreduced Stiffness
General Second 𝐾𝐾 = 𝐾𝐾2 (used for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 )
(for all stories)
Order Elastic 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 Notional load with gravity combos only
= 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 Notional load coefficient = 0.002 (typically)
𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦
Analysis
(for all columns) 𝐵𝐵1 = 1
𝐵𝐵2 = 1

Analysis Methods 12
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

Table 2-1: The Essentials and Limitations of the Design Analysis Methods
Direct Analysis Method
Limitation or
Option Variable Essentials of the Method
Applicability
Δ2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 1st Order Analysis
≤ 1.5 Unreduced stiffness
Δ1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
(for all stories) 𝐾𝐾1 for 𝐵𝐵1
Amplified First 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝐾𝐾2 for 𝐵𝐵2
= 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐾𝐾 = 𝐾𝐾2 (used for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 )
𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦
Order Analysis
(for all columns) Notional load with gravity combos only
Notional load with coefficient = 0.002 (typically)
Use of B1 and B2
Limited First Order Analysis
Δ2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 1st Order Analysis
≤ 1.5
Δ1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 Unreduced stiffness
Limited First 𝐾𝐾2 for 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (not 𝐵𝐵2 )
(for all stories)
Order Elastic 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 Notional load with all combos
≤ 0.5 𝛥𝛥
Notional load with coefficient = (2)𝛼𝛼 � � ≥ 0.0042
Analysis 𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦 𝐿𝐿

(for all columns)

The program has several limitations that have been stated in Section 1.5 and the preceding
paragraphs. Additionally, the user must be aware that it is possible to choose a design option that
violates certain provisions of the AISC code that will not be identified by the program. The
limitation for the use of the effective length method, namely, the requirement that Δ2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ⁄Δ1𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ≤
1.5 and 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 must be verified by the user. To assist users in making validity checks, the ratio
𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 and 𝜏𝜏 are now reported in tabular form for each member.

2.7 Notional Load Patterns

Notional loads are lateral loads that are applied at each framing level and are specified as a
percentage of the gravity loads applied at that level. They are intended to account for the
destabilizing effects of out-of-plumbness, geometric imperfections, inelasticity in structural
members, and any other effects that could induce sway and that are not explicitly considered in
the analysis.

The program allows the user to create a Notional Load pattern as a percentage of the previously
defined gravity load pattern to be applied in one of the global lateral directions: X or Y. The user
can define more than one notional load pattern associated with one gravity load by considering
different factors and different directions. In the ANSI/AISC 360-22 code, the notional loads are
typically suggested to be 0.2% (or 0.002) (AISC C2.2b(3)), a factor referred to as the notional
load coefficient in this document. The notional load coefficient can be 0.003 (AISC C2.3(3)). In
some cases, it can be a function of second order effects measured by relative story sway (AISC
App. 7.3(2)). The code also gives some flexibility to allow the engineer-of-record to apply
judgment.

The notional load patterns should be considered in combination with appropriate factors,
appropriate directions, and appropriate senses. Some of the design analysis methods need the
notional loads to be considered only in gravity load combinations (AISC C2.2b(4)), and some of
the methods need the notional loads to be considered in all the design load combinations (AISC

Notional Load Patterns 13

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

C2.2b(4)). For a complete list, see Table 2-1 in the preceding “Analysis Methods” section of this
chapter.

Currently, the notional loads are automatically included in the default design load combinations
that include lateral loads. However, the user is free to modify the default design load combinations
to include the notional loads with appropriate factors and in appropriate load combinations.

2.8 Member Unsupported Lengths

The column unsupported lengths are required to account for column slenderness effects for
flexural buckling and for lateral-torsional buckling. The program automatically determines the
unsupported length ratios, which are specified as a fraction of the frame object length. These
ratios times the frame object lengths give the unbraced lengths for the member. These ratios can
also be overwritten by the user on a member-by-member basis, if desired, using the overwrite
option.

Two unsupported lengths, 𝑙𝑙33 and 𝑙𝑙22 , as shown in Figure 2-2 are to be considered for flexural
buckling. These are the lengths between support points of the member in the corresponding
directions. The length 𝑙𝑙33 corresponds to instability about the 3-3 axis (major axis), and 𝑙𝑙22
corresponds to instability about the 2-2 axis (minor axis). The length 𝑙𝑙𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 , not shown in the
figure, is also used for lateral-torsional buckling caused by major direction bending (i.e., about
the 3-3 axis).

In determining the values for 𝑙𝑙33 and 𝑙𝑙22 of the members, the program recognizes various aspects
of the structure that have an effect on these lengths, such as member connectivity, diaphragm
constraints and support points. The program automatically locates the member support points and
evaluates the corresponding unsupported length.

It is possible for the unsupported length of a frame object to be evaluated by the program as
greater than the corresponding member length. For example, assume a column has a beam framing
into it in one direction, but not the other, at a floor level. In that case, the column is assumed to
be supported in one direction only at that story level, and its unsupported length in the other
direction will exceed the story height.

By default, the unsupported length for lateral-torsional buckling, 𝑙𝑙𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 is taken to be equal to the
𝑙𝑙22 factor. Similar to 𝑙𝑙22 and 𝑙𝑙33 , 𝑙𝑙𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 can be overwritten.

Member Unsupported Lengths 14

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

Figure 2-2 Unsupported Lengths l33 and l22

2.9 Effects of Breaking a Member into Multiple Elements

The preferred method is to model a beam, column or brace member as one single element.
However, the user can request that the program break a member internally at framing intersections
and at specified intervals. In this way, accuracy in modeling can be maintained, at the same time
design/check specifications can be applied accurately. There is special emphasis on the end forces
(moments in particular) for many different aspects of beam, column and brace design. If the
member is manually meshed (broken) into segments, maintaining the integrity of the design
algorithm becomes difficult.

Manually, breaking a column member into several elements can affect many things during design
in the program.

1. The unbraced length: The unbraced length is really the unsupported length between braces.
If there is no intermediate brace in the member, the unbraced length is typically calculated
automatically by the program from the top of the flange of the beam framing the column at
bottom to the bottom of the flange of the beam framing the column at the top. The
automatically calculated length factor typically becomes less than 1. If there are intermediate
bracing points, the user should overwrite the unbraced length factor in the program. The user
should choose the critical (larger) one. Even if the user breaks the element, the program
typically picks up the unbraced length correctly, provided that there is no intermediate
bracing point.

2. 𝐾𝐾-factor: Even if the user breaks the member into pieces, the program typically can pick up
the 𝐾𝐾-factors correctly. However, sometimes it cannot. The user should note the 𝐾𝐾-factors.
All segments of the member should have the same 𝐾𝐾-factor, and it should be calculated based
on the entire member. If the calculated 𝐾𝐾-factor is not reasonable, the user can overwrite the
𝐾𝐾-factors for all the segments.

Effects of Breaking a Member into Multiple Elements 15

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

3. 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 factor: The 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 factor should be based on the end moments of unbraced lengths of each
segment and should not be based on the end moments of the member. The program already
calculates the 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 factors based on the end moments of unbraced lengths of each segment. If
the break-up points are the brace points, no action is required by the user. If the broken
segments do not represent the brace-to-brace unsupported length, the program calculated 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚
factor is conservative. If this conservative value is acceptable, no action is required by the
user. If it is not acceptable, the user can calculate the 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 factor manually for the critical
combination and overwrite its value for that segment.

4. 𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 factor: The logic is similar to that for the 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 factor.

5. 𝐵𝐵1 factor: This factor amplifies the factored moments for the 𝑃𝑃 − 𝛿𝛿 effect. In its expression,
there are the 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 factor and the Euler Buckling capacity 𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 . If the user keeps the unbraced
length ratios (𝑙𝑙33 and 𝑙𝑙22 ) and the 𝐾𝐾-factors (𝐾𝐾22 and 𝐾𝐾33 ) correct, the 𝐵𝐵1 factor would be
correct. If the axial force is small, the 𝐵𝐵1 factor can be 1 and have no effect with respect to
modeling the single segment or multi-segment element.

6. 𝐵𝐵2 factor: The program does not calculate the 𝐵𝐵2 factor. The program assumes that the user
turns on the 𝑃𝑃 − Δ. In such cases, 𝐵𝐵2 can be taken as equal to 1. That means the modeling
with one or multiple segments has no effect on this factor.

If the user models a column with a single element and makes sure that 𝑙𝑙-factors and 𝐾𝐾-factors are
correct, the effect of 𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 will be picked up correctly. The factors 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 and 𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 will be picked
up correctly if there is no intermediate bracing point. The calculated 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 and 𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 factors will be
slightly conservative if there are intermediate bracing points.
If the user models a column with multiple elements and makes sure that 𝑙𝑙-factors and 𝐾𝐾-factors
are correct, the effect of 𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 will be picked up correctly. The factors 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 and 𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 will be
picked up correctly if the member is broken at the bracing points. The calculated 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 and 𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏
factors will be conservative if the member is not broken at the bracing points.

2.10 Effective Length Factor (K)

The effective length method for calculating member axial compressive strength has been used in
various forms in several stability-based design codes. The method originates from calculating
effective buckling lengths, 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾, and is based on elastic/inelastic stability theory. The effective
buckling length is used to calculate an axial compressive strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , through an empirical
column curve that accounts for geometric imperfections, distributed yielding, and residual
stresses present in the cross-section.

There are two types of 𝐾𝐾-factor in the ANSI/AISC 360-22 code. The first type of 𝐾𝐾-factor is used
for calculating the Euler axial capacity assuming that all of the beam-column joints are held in
place, i.e., no lateral translation is allowed. The resulting axial capacity is used in calculation of
the 𝐵𝐵1 factor. This 𝐾𝐾-factor is named as 𝐾𝐾1 in the code. This 𝐾𝐾1 factor is always less than 1 and
is not calculated. By default the program uses the value of 1 for 𝐾𝐾1 . The program allows the user
to overwrite 𝐾𝐾1 on a member-by-member basis.

Effective Length Factor (K) 16

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

The other 𝐾𝐾-factor is used for calculating the Euler axial capacity assuming that all the beam-
column joints are free to sway, i.e., lateral translation is allowed. The resulting axial capacity is
used in calculating 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 . This 𝐾𝐾-factor is named as 𝐾𝐾2 in the code. This 𝐾𝐾2 is always greater than 1
if the frame is a sway frame. The program calculates the 𝐾𝐾2 factor automatically based on sway
condition. The program also allows the user to overwrite 𝐾𝐾2 factors on a member-by-member
basis. The same 𝐾𝐾2 factor is supposed to be used in calculation of the 𝐵𝐵2 factor. However, the
program does not calculate 𝐵𝐵2 factors and relies on the overwritten values. If the frame is not
really a sway frame, the user should overwrite the 𝐾𝐾2 factors.

Both 𝐾𝐾1 and 𝐾𝐾2 have two values: one for major direction and the other for minor direction,
𝐾𝐾1𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 , 𝐾𝐾1𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 , 𝐾𝐾2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 , 𝐾𝐾2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 .

There is another 𝐾𝐾-factor. 𝐾𝐾𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 for lateral torsional buckling. By default, 𝐾𝐾𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 is taken as equal
to 𝐾𝐾2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 . However, the user can overwrite this on a member-by-member basis.

The rest of this section is dedicated to the determination of 𝐾𝐾2 factors.

The 𝐾𝐾-factor algorithm has been developed for building-type structures, where the columns are
vertical and the beams are horizontal, and the behavior is basically that of a moment-resisting
frame for which the 𝐾𝐾-factor calculation is relatively complex. For the purpose of calculating 𝐾𝐾-
factors, the objects are identified as columns, beam and braces. All frame objects parallel to the
Z-axis are classified as columns. All objects parallel to the X-Y plane are classified as beams.
The remainders are considered to be braces.

The beams and braces are assigned 𝐾𝐾-factors of unity. In the calculation of the 𝐾𝐾-factors for a
column object, the program first makes the following four stiffness summations for each joint in
the structural model:

𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 𝐸𝐸𝑏𝑏 𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏

𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = � � � 𝑆𝑆𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = � � �
𝐿𝐿𝑐𝑐 𝑥𝑥 𝐿𝐿𝑏𝑏 𝑥𝑥

𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 𝐸𝐸𝑏𝑏 𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏

𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = � � � 𝑆𝑆𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = � � �
𝐿𝐿𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦 𝐿𝐿𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦

where the x and y subscripts correspond to the global X and Y directions and the c and b subscripts
refer to column and beam. The local 2-2 and 3-3 terms 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸22 /𝐿𝐿22 and 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸33 /𝐿𝐿33 are rotated to give
components along the global X and Y directions to form the (𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸/𝐿𝐿)𝑥𝑥 and (𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸/𝐿𝐿)𝑦𝑦 values. Then
for each column, the joint summations at END-I and the END-J of the member are transformed
back to the column local 1-2-3 coordinate system, and the 𝐺𝐺-values for END-I and the END-J of
the member are calculated about the 2-2 and 3-3 directions as follows:
𝐼𝐼 𝐽𝐽
𝐼𝐼
𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐22 𝐽𝐽 𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐22
𝐺𝐺22 = 𝐼𝐼 𝐺𝐺22 =
𝑆𝑆𝑏𝑏22 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆𝑏𝑏22
𝐼𝐼 𝐽𝐽
𝐼𝐼
𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐33 𝐽𝐽 𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐33
𝐺𝐺33 = 𝐼𝐼 𝐺𝐺33 =
𝑆𝑆𝑏𝑏33 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆𝑏𝑏33

Effective Length Factor (K) 17

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

If a rotational release exists at a particular end (and direction) of an object, the corresponding
value of 𝐺𝐺 is set to 10.0. If all degrees of freedom for a particular joint are deleted, the 𝐺𝐺-values
for all members connecting to that joint will be set to 1.0 for the end of the member connecting
to that joint. Finally, if 𝐺𝐺 𝐼𝐼 and 𝐺𝐺 𝐽𝐽 are known for a particular direction, the column 𝐾𝐾-factor for
the corresponding direction is calculated by solving the following relationship for 𝛼𝛼:

𝛼𝛼 2 𝐺𝐺 𝐼𝐼 𝐺𝐺 𝐽𝐽 − 36 𝛼𝛼
=
6(𝐺𝐺 + 𝐺𝐺 )
𝐼𝐼 𝐽𝐽 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡

from which 𝐾𝐾 = 𝜋𝜋/𝛼𝛼. This relationship is the mathematical formulation for the evaluation of 𝐾𝐾-
factors for moment-resisting frames assuming sidesway to be uninhibited. For other structures,
such as braced frame structures, the K-factors for all members are usually unity and should be set
so by the user. The following are some important aspects associated with the column K-factor
algorithm:

• An object that has a pin at the joint under consideration will not enter the stiffness
summations calculated as previously described. An object that has a pin at the far end
from the joint under consideration will contribute only 50% of the calculated 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 value.
Also, beam members that have no column member at the far end from the joint under
consideration, such as cantilevers, will not enter the stiffness summation.
• If there are no beams framing into a particular direction of a column member, the
associated 𝐺𝐺-value will be infinity. If the 𝐺𝐺-value at any one end of a column for a
particular direction is infinity, the 𝐾𝐾-factor corresponding to that direction is set equal to
unity.
• If rotational releases exist at both ends of an object for a particular direction, the
corresponding 𝐾𝐾-factor is set to unity.
• The automated 𝐾𝐾-factor calculation procedure can occasionally generate artificially high
𝐾𝐾-factors, specifically under circumstances involving skewed beams, fixed support
conditions, and under other conditions where the program may have difficulty
recognizing that the members are laterally supported and 𝐾𝐾-factors of unity are to be
used.
• All 𝐾𝐾-factors produced by the program can be overwritten by the user. These values
should be reviewed, and any unacceptable values should be replaced.
• The beams and braces are assigned 𝐾𝐾-factors of unity.

When a composite column design is performed in accordance with ANSI/AISC 360-22 provisions
and the analysis method is chosen to be any of the four direct analysis methods, the 𝐾𝐾2 factors are
automatically taken as 1 (AISC C.3). The calculated 𝐾𝐾2 factors and their overwritten values are
not considered in design.

Effective Length Factor (K) 18

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Prerequisites

2.11 Choice of Units

English as well as SI and MKS metric units can be used for input. The codes are based on a
specific system of units. All equations and descriptions presented in the subsequent chapters
correspond to that specific system of units unless otherwise noted. However, any system of units
can be used to define and design a structure in the program.

The Display Unit preferences allow the user to specify the units.

Choice of Units 19
 3 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

This chapter provides a detailed description of the algorithms used by the programs in the
design/check of structures in accordance with “ANSI/AISC 360-22 ‒ Specifications for Structural
Steel Building” (AISC 2022a, b). The menu option does not cover the “ANSI/AISC 341-22 ‒
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Building” (AISC 2022c). The implementation covers load
combinations from “ASCE/SEI 7-22,” which is described in the section “Design Loading
Combinations” in this chapter. The loading based on “ASCE/SEI 7-22” has been described in a
separate document entitled “CSI Lateral Load Manual” (CSI 2020).

For referring to pertinent sections of the corresponding code, a unique prefix is assigned for each
code.

• Reference to the ANSI/AISC 360-22 code is identified with the prefix “AISC.”
• Reference to the ANSI/AISC 341-22 code is identified with the prefix “AISC SEISMIC”
or sometimes “SEISMIC” only.
• Reference to the ASCE/SEI 7-22 code is identified with the prefix “ASCE.”
• Reference to the ACI 318-14 code is identified with the prefix “ACI.”

3.1 Notations
The various notations used in this chapter are described herein.

𝐴𝐴 Cross-sectional area, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2

𝐴𝐴𝑒𝑒 Effective cross-sectional area for slender sections, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 Gross cross-sectional area, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣2 , 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣3 Major and minor shear areas, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 Shear area of the web, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐵𝐵1 Multiplier to account for 𝑃𝑃 − 𝛿𝛿 effects
𝐵𝐵2 Multiplier to account for 𝑃𝑃 − Δ effects
𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 Bending coefficient dependent on moment gradient used in
calculation of lateral-torsional buckling moment
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 Coefficient assuming no lateral translation of frame
𝐶𝐶𝑤𝑤 Torsional warping constant of cross-section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖6
𝐷𝐷 Outside diameter of pipes, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝐸𝐸 Modulus of elasticity, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘

Notations 20
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 Critical compressive stress, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐 Compressive residual stress in flange, assumed 10.0 for rolled
sections and 16.5 for welded sections, ksi
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 Yield stress, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝐺𝐺 Shear modulus, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝐼𝐼𝑦𝑦 or 𝐼𝐼22 Minor moment of inertia, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖4
𝐼𝐼𝑥𝑥 or 𝐼𝐼33 Major moment of inertia, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖4
𝐽𝐽 Saint-Venant torsional constant of the section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖4
𝐾𝐾 Effective length factor
K1 Effective length factor for braced condition
K2 Effective length factor for unbraced condition
𝐾𝐾𝑥𝑥 or 𝐾𝐾33 Effective length factor for buckling about major axis
𝐾𝐾𝑦𝑦 or 𝐾𝐾22 Effective length factor for buckling about minor axis
𝐿𝐿𝑏𝑏 Lateral-torsionally unbraced length of member, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝐿𝐿𝑝𝑝 Limiting laterally unbraced length for full plastic capacity, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Factored moments causing sidesway, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 Factored moments not causing sidesway, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 or 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛33 Allowable flexural strength in major direction, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 or 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛22 Allowable flexural strength in minor direction, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 or 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟33 Major limiting buckling moments, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 or 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟22 Minor limiting buckling moments, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 or 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢33 Factored moment in major direction, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 or 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢22 Factored moment in minor direction, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 Euler buckling load, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 Allowable axial strength, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑃𝑃𝑢𝑢 Factored axial force in member, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 , 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑄𝑄 Reduction factor for slender section = 𝑄𝑄𝑎𝑎 𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠
𝑄𝑄𝑎𝑎 Reduction factor for stiffened slender elements
𝑄𝑄𝑠𝑠 Reduction factor for unstiffened slender elements
𝑆𝑆 Section modulus, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖3
𝑆𝑆𝑐𝑐 Section modulus for compression in an angle section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖3
𝑆𝑆𝑥𝑥 or 𝑆𝑆33 Major section modulus, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖3
𝑆𝑆𝑦𝑦 or 𝑆𝑆22 Minor section modulus, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖3
𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 or 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛3 Allowable minor shear strengths, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 or 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2 Allowable major shear strengths, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 or 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢3 Factored minor shear loads, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 or 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢2 Factored major shear loads, 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑍𝑍 Plastic modulus, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖3
𝑍𝑍𝑥𝑥 or 𝑍𝑍33 Major plastic modulus, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖3
𝑏𝑏 Allowable dimension of plate in a section, in.
longer leg of angle sections, 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 for welded and 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 − 3𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
for rolled box sections, and the like
𝑏𝑏𝑒𝑒 Effective width of flange, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 Flange width, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑑𝑑 Overall depth of member, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.

Notations 21
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒 Effective depth of web, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.

ℎ𝑐𝑐 Clear distance between flanges less fillets, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
assumed 𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑘𝑘 for rolled sections, and 𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 for welded
sections
𝑘𝑘 Distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐 Parameter used for section classification 𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐 = 4/�ℎ/𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 , 0.35 ≤
𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐 ≤ 0.763
𝑙𝑙𝑥𝑥 or 𝑙𝑙33 Unbraced length of member for buckling about major axis, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑙𝑙𝑦𝑦 or 𝑙𝑙22 Unbraced length of member for buckling about minor axis, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑟𝑟 Radius of gyration of full unreduced cross-section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑟𝑟𝑜𝑜 Polar radius of gyration of cross-section about shear center, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑟𝑟𝑥𝑥 or 𝑟𝑟33 Radius of gyration in the major directions, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑟𝑟𝑦𝑦 or 𝑟𝑟22 Radius of gyration in the minor directions, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑡𝑡 Thickness of the element of the section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 Thickness of flange, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 Thickness of web, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖.
𝜆𝜆 Slenderness parameter
𝜆𝜆𝑐𝑐 , 𝜆𝜆𝑒𝑒 Column slenderness parameters
𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 Limiting slenderness parameter for compact element
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 Limiting slenderness parameter for non-compact element
𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 Limiting slenderness parameter for seismic element
𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 Limiting slenderness parameter for slender element
Φ𝑏𝑏 Resistance factor for bending
Φ𝑐𝑐 Resistance factor for compression
Φ𝑡𝑡 Resistance factor for tension yielding
Φ 𝑇𝑇 Resistance factor for torsion
Φ𝑣𝑣 Resistance factor for shear
Ω𝑏𝑏 Safety factor for bending
Ω𝑐𝑐 Safety factor for compression
Ω𝑡𝑡 Safety factor for tension yielding or rupture
Ω 𝑇𝑇 Safety factor for torsion
Ω𝑣𝑣 Safety factor for shear

3.2 Design Loading Combinations

The structure is to be designed so that its design strength equals or exceeds the effects of factored
loads stipulated by the applicable design code. The default design combinations are the various
combinations of the already defined load cases, such as dead load (DL), live load (LL), roof live
load (RL), snow load (SL), wind load (WL), and horizontal earthquake load (EL).

AISC 360-22 refers to the applicable building code for the loads and load combinations to be
considered in the design, and to ASCE 7-22 in the absence of such a building code. Hence, the
default design combinations used in the current version are the ones stipulated in ASCE 7-22:

Design Loading Combinations 22

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

For design in accordance with LRFD provisions:

1.4𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 (ASCE 2.3.2-1)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.6𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.5𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (ASCE 2.3.2-2)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 1.6𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (ASCE 2.3.2-3)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.6𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.5𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 (ASCE 2.3.2-2)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 1.6𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 (ASCE 2.3.2-3)
0.9𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 1.0𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.3.2-6)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.6𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 ± 0.5𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.3.2-3)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.5𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 ± 1.0𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.3.2-4)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.6𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ± 0.5𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.3.2-3)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.5𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ± 1.0𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.3.2-4)
0.9𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 1.0𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.3.2-7)
1.2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.2𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ± 1.0𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.3.2-5)
For design in accordance with ASD provisions:
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 (ASCE 2.4.1-1)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (ASCE 2.4.1-2)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (ASCE 2.4.1-3)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 0.75𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.75𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 (ASCE 2.3.2-4)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 1.0𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 (ASCE 2.4.1-3)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 0.75𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.75𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 (ASCE 2.3.2-4)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.6𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.4.1-5)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 0.75𝐿𝐿 + 0.75𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 ± 0.75(0.6𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) (ASCE 2.4.1-6a)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 0.75𝐿𝐿 + 0.75𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ± 0.75(0.6𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) (ASCE 2.4.1-6a)
0.6𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.6𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (ASCE 2.4.1-7)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.7𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.4.1-5)
1.0𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 0.75𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 0.75𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ± 0.75(0.6𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸) (ASCE 2.4.1-6b)
0.6𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.7𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.4.1-8)
Most of the analysis methods recognized by the code are required to consider Notional Load in
the design loading combinations for steel frame design. The program allows the user to define
and create notional loads as individual load cases from a specified percentage of a given gravity
load acting in a particular lateral direction. These notional load patterns should be considered in
the combinations with appropriate factors, appropriate directions, and appropriate senses.
Currently, the program automatically includes the notional loads in the default design load
combinations for gravity combinations only. The user is free to modify the default design
preferences to include the notional loads for combinations involving lateral loads. For further
information, refer to the “Load Combinations and Notional Loads” section in Chapter 2.

The program automatically considers seismic load effects, including overstrength factors (ASCE
12.4.3), as special load combinations that are created automatically from each load combination,
involving seismic loads. In that case, the horizontal component of the force is represented by 𝐸𝐸ℎ𝑚𝑚
and the vertical component of the force is represented by 𝐸𝐸𝑉𝑉 , where
𝐸𝐸ℎ𝑚𝑚 = Ω0 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 12.4.3.1)

Design Loading Combinations 23

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝐸𝐸𝑣𝑣 = 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷 (ASCE 12.4.2.2)

where, Ω0 is the overstrength factor and it is taken from ASCE 7-22 Table 12.2-1. The factor S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
is described later in this section. Effectively, the special seismic combinations that are considered
for the LRFD provision are
(1.2 + 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± Ω0 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.3.2-5, 12.4.3.2)
(1.2 + 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± Ω0 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 ± 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (ASCE 2.3.2-5, 12.4.3.2)
(0.9 − 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± Ω0 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.3.2-7, 12.4.3.2)
and for the ASD provision the combinations are

(1.0 + 0.14S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.7Ω0 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.4.1-5, 12.4.3.2)

(1.0 + 0.10S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.75(0.7Ω0 )𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 + 0.75𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (ASCE 2.4.1-6b,12.4.3.2)
(0.6 − 0.14S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.7Ω0 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.4.1-8,12.4.3.2)
The program assumes that the defined earthquake load is really the strength level earthquake,
which is equivalent to 𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 as defined in Section 12.4.2.1 of the ASCE 7-22 code. For a regular
earthquake, load is considered to have two components: horizontal, 𝐸𝐸ℎ and vertical 𝐸𝐸ℎ , which are
taken as
𝐸𝐸ℎ = 𝜌𝜌𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 12.4.2.1)
𝐸𝐸𝑣𝑣 = 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷 (ASCE 12.4.2.2)
where, 𝜌𝜌 is the redundancy factor as defined in Section 12.3.4 of ASCE 7-22, and the S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 is the
design earthquake spectral response acceleration parameters at short periods, as defined in Section
11.4.4 of ASCE 7-22 code.

Effectively, the seismic load combination for the LRFD provision becomes:
(1.2 + 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 𝜌𝜌𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.3.2-5, 12.4.2.3)
(1.2 + 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 𝜌𝜌𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 ± 1.0𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (ASCE 2.3.2-5, 12.4.2.3)
(0.9 − 0.2S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 𝜌𝜌𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.3.2-7, 12.4.2.3)
The seismic load combinations for the ASD provision become:
(1.0 + 0.14S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.7𝜌𝜌𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.4.1-5, 12.4.2.3)
(1.0 + 0.10S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.75(0.7𝜌𝜌)𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 + 0.75𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (ASCE 2.4.1-6b,12.4.2.3)
(0.6 − 0.14S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 )𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ± 0.7𝜌𝜌𝑄𝑄𝐸𝐸 (ASCE 2.4.1-8,12.4.2.3)
The program assumes that the seismic load defined as the strength level load is the program load
case. Otherwise, the factors 𝜌𝜌, Ω0 , and S𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 will not be able to scale the load to the desired level.

The combinations described herein are the default loading combinations only. They can be deleted
or edited as required by the design code or engineer-of-record.

The program allows live load reduction factors to be applied to the member forces of the reducible
live load case on a member-by-member basis to reduce the contribution of the live load to the
factored responses.

Design Loading Combinations 24

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

3.3 Calculation of Factored Forces and Moments

The factored member loads that are calculated for each load combination are 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 , 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟33 , 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟22 , 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟2 ,
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟3 , and 𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟 corresponding to factored values of the axial load, the major and minor moments and
shears, and torsion, respectively. These factored loads are calculated at each of the previously
defined stations.

The factored forces can be amplified to consider second order effects, depending on the choice of
analysis method chosen in the Preferences. If the analysis method is chosen to be General Second
Order Elastic Analysis or any of the Direct Analysis methods with General Second Order
Analysis, it is assumed that the analysis considers the influence of second-order effects (𝑃𝑃 − Δ
and 𝑃𝑃 − 𝛿𝛿 effects); hence the analysis results are used without amplification (AISC C1). Second-
order effects due to overall sway of the structure can usually be accounted for, conservatively, by
considering the second-order effects on the structure under one set of loads (usually the most
severe gravity load case) and performing all other analyses as linear using the stiffness matrix
developed for this one set of P-delta loads (see also White and Hajjar 1991). For a more accurate
analysis, it is always possible to define each loading combination as a nonlinear load case that
considers only geometric nonlinearities. For both approaches, when 𝑃𝑃 − 𝛿𝛿 effects are expected to
be important, use more than one element per frame object (accomplished using the frame auto
mesh option; refer to the program Help for more information about automatic frame subdivide).

If the analysis method is chosen to be Second Order Analysis by Amplified First Order Analysis
or any of the Direct Analysis Methods with Amplified First Order Analysis (AISC C2.1(2), App.
8.2), it is assumed that the analysis does not consider the influence of second order effects (−Δ
and 𝑃𝑃 − 𝛿𝛿). Hence the analysis results are amplified using 𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 factors using the following
approximate second-order analysis for calculating the required flexural and axial strengths in
members of lateral load resisting systems. The required second-order flexural strength, 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 , and
axial strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 , are determined as follows:
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 = 𝐵𝐵1 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵2 𝑀𝑀𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 (AISC A-8-1)
𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 = 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵2 𝑃𝑃𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 (AISC A-8-1)
where,
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝐵1 =
𝑃𝑃 (AISC A-8-3)
�1 − 𝛼𝛼 𝑃𝑃 𝑟𝑟 �
𝑒𝑒1

1
𝐵𝐵2 = ≥ 1.0
𝑃𝑃𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC A-8-6)
�1 − 𝛼𝛼 �
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒,𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

1.0 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝛼𝛼 = �
1.6 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 = required second-order flexural strength using LFRD and ASD load
combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = first-order moment using LFRD and ASD load combinations, assuming there is
no lateral translation of the frame, kip-in. (N-mm)
𝑀𝑀𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = first-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations caused by lateral
translation of the frame only, kip-in (N-mm)

Calculation of Factored Forces and Moments 25

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 = required second-order axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
kip (N)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations, assuming there
is no lateral translation of the frame, kips (N)
𝑃𝑃𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = total vertical load supported by the story using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, including gravity column loads, kips (N)
𝑃𝑃𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations caused by lateral
translation of the frame only, kips (N)
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 = a coefficient assuming no lateral translation of the frame, whose value is taken
as follows:
(i) For beam-columns not subject to transverse loading between supports in
the plane of bending,
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 = 0.6 − 0.4(𝑀𝑀1 /𝑀𝑀2 ) (AISC A-8-4)
where 𝑀𝑀1 and 𝑀𝑀2 , calculated from a first-order analysis, are the smaller and
larger moments, respectively, at the ends of that portion of the member
unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. 𝑀𝑀1 /𝑀𝑀2 is positive
when the member is bent in reverse curvature, negative when bent in single
curvature.
(ii) For beam-columns subjected to transverse loading between supports, the
value of 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 is conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases.
When 𝑀𝑀2 is zero, 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 is taken as 1.0, the program defaults 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 to 1.0, if the
unbraced length is more than actual member length. The user can overwrite
the value of 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 for any member. 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 can be expressed as follows:

1.00, if length is more than actual length,

1.00, if tension member,

Cm = 1.00, if both ends unrestrained,
 M
0.6 − 0.4 a , if no transverse loading, and
 Mb
1.00, if transverse loading is present.

(AISC A-8-4, App 8.2.1)
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒1 = elastic critical buckling resistance of the member in the plane of bending,
calculated based on the assumption of zero side-sway, kips (N)
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒1 = 𝜋𝜋 2 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ⁄(𝐾𝐾1 𝐿𝐿)2 (AISC A-8-5)
If any of the direct analysis methods are used, the reduced value of EI is used
(AISC C3.3).
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒,𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = elastic critical buckling resistance for the story determined by sidesway
buckling analysis, kips (N)
For moment frames, where sidesway buckling effective length factor 𝐾𝐾2 is
determined for the columns, it is the elastic story sidesway buckling resistance
and calculated as
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒,𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑅𝑅𝑀𝑀 (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻⁄Δ𝐻𝐻 ) (AISC A-8-7)
where
𝐸𝐸 = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi

Calculation of Factored Forces and Moments 26

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

If any of the direct analysis methods are used, the reduced value of 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 is used
(AISC App. 8.2.1).
𝐼𝐼 = moment of inertia in the plane of bending, in.4 (mm4)
𝐿𝐿 = story height, in. (mm)
𝐾𝐾1 = effective length factor in the plane of bending, calculated based on the
assumption of no lateral translation. It is taken to be equal to 1.0, conservatively.
The Overwrites can be used to change the value of 𝐾𝐾1 for the major and minor
directions.
𝐾𝐾2 = effective length factor in the plane of bending, calculated based on a sidesway
buckling analysis. The Overwrites can be used to change the value of 𝐾𝐾2 for the
major and minor directions.
In the expression of 𝐵𝐵1 , the required axial force 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 is used based on its first order value. The
magnification factor 𝐵𝐵1 must be a positive number. Therefore, 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 must be less than 𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒1 . If 𝛼𝛼𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟
is found to be greater than or equal to 𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒1 , a failure condition is declared.

If the program assumptions are not satisfactory for a particular structural model or member, the
user has the choice to explicitly specify the values of 𝐵𝐵1 for any member.

Currently, the program does not calculate the 𝐵𝐵2 factor. The user is required to overwrite the
values of 𝐵𝐵2 for the members.

3.4 Design of Composite Column

Two major categories are supported in the program when the Composite Column Design option
is used, i.e., Filled Composite sections and Encased Composite sections. Each category is
documented in detail in Sections 3.5 and 3.6.

The nominal strengths in compression, tension, bending, and shear are computed for Compact,
Noncompact, and Slender members in accordance with the following sections. The nominal
flexural strengths for all shapes of sections are calculated based on their principal axes of bending.
For the Filled Box and Filled Pipe sections, the principal axes coincide with their geometric axes.

The nominal strengths in compression and flexure due to global buckling depend heavily on the
unbraced length about the axis of bending. These unbraced lengths can be specified as a fraction
of the member length in the Overwrites. By specifying a ratio for an unbraced length type, the
number of brace points will be internally determined, and the braced point locations will be
arranged such that they are symmetric over the center line of the member and 𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≤ 𝐿𝐿 (Figure
3-1). For the design stations that are within the 𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 , the braced points are the end joint and the
point at the location that is of the unbraced length 𝐿𝐿 away from the end joint. These braced points
are used only to determine the shape of the moment diagram needed to compute intermediate
design parameters. The unbraced length 𝐿𝐿 is still used to calculate the axial compression and
moment capacities. By default, the unbraced length ratios about major and minor axes of bending
are determined by the analysis of structures, and the unbraced length ratios for lateral-torsional
and distortional buckling are taken as unity.

Design of Composite Column 27

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

Figure 3-1: Braced point locations by Overwrites

The lateral-torsional bracing condition can also be specified by point and/or uniform bracing in
the Lateral Bracing option under the Design menu. However, the bracing condition assigned by
this option will be overwritten by the user-specified unbraced length ratio for lateral-torsional
buckling in the Overwrites.

For all sections, the nominal shear strengths are calculated for directions aligned with the
geometric axes, which typically coincide with the principal axes.

If the user specifies nonzero nominal capacities for one or more of the members on the composite
column Overwrites form, those values will overwrite the calculated values for those members.
The specified capacities should be based on the principal axes of bending for flexure and the
geometric axes for shear.

3.5 Filled Composite Sections

3.5.1 Classification for Local Buckling

The nominal strengths for flexure and axial compression are dependent on the classification of
the section as Compact, Noncompact, Slender, or Too Slender. Compact sections are capable of
developing full plastic strength before local buckling occurs. Non-compact sections can develop
partial yielding in compression and buckle inelastically before reaching a fully plastic stress
distribution. Slender sections buckle elastically before any of the elements yield under
compression.

Local buckling effects are considered for Filled Box and Filled Pipe sections (AISC I1.2, I1.4).

Sections are classified as Compact, Noncompact, or Slender sections in accordance with Section
I1.4 of the code (AISC I1.4). For a section to qualify as Compact in flexure, its flanges must be
continuously connected to the web or webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression
elements must not exceed the limiting width-thickness ratios 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 from Table I1.1B of the code. If
the width-thickness ratio of one or more compression elements exceeds 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 , but does not exceed
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 from Table I1.1B, the section is Noncompact. If the width-thickness ratio of any element
exceeds 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 but does not exceed 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , the section is Slender. If the width-thickness ratio of any
element exceeds 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , the section is considered Too Slender. The expressions of 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 , 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 , and 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , as
implemented in the program, are reported in Table 3-1 (AISC Table I1.1B, I1.4). The limit
demarcating Slender and Too Slender has been identified as 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 in this document.

For compression, sections are classified as Compact, Noncompact, Slender and Too Slender
sections as reported in Table 3-2 (AISC I1.4, Table I1.1A). Similarly, the classification of sections
for flexure is Noncompact, if the width-thickness ratio of one or more compression elements

Filled Composite Sections 28

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

exceeds 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 , but does not exceed 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 from Table I1.1B. If the width-thickness ratio of any element
exceeds 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 but does not exceed 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , the section is Slender. If the width-thickness ratio of any
element exceeds 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , the section is considered Too Slender. The expressions of 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 , 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , and 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , as
implemented in the program, are reported in Table 3-2 (AISC Table 1.1B, I1.4).

The table uses the variables 𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐 , ℎ, 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 , 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 , 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 , 𝑏𝑏, 𝑡𝑡, 𝐷𝐷, 𝑑𝑑 and so on. The variables 𝑏𝑏, 𝑡𝑡, 𝐷𝐷, and 𝑑𝑑
are explained in the respective figures inside the table. The variables 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 , 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 , 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 , ℎ, ℎ𝑝𝑝 , ℎ𝑐𝑐 , and 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
are explained in Figure 3-2

Refer to Table 3-1 (AISC Table I1.1A, I1.1B) for the graphic representation of unstiffened
element dimensions.

Figure 3-2 AISC 306-22 Definition of Geometric Properties

For stiffened elements supported along two edges parallel to the direction of the compression
force, the width shall be taken as follows:
(a) For webs of rolled or formed sections, ℎ is the clear distance between flanges less the fillet
or corner radius at each flange.
(b) For webs of built-up sections, ℎ is the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the
clear distance between flanges when welds are used.
(c) For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up sections, the width 𝑏𝑏 is the distance between
adjacent lines of fasteners or lines of welds.

(d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections (HSS), the width 𝑏𝑏 is the clear distance
between webs less the inside corner radius on each side. For webs of rectangular HSS, ℎ is
the clear distance between the flanges less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner
radius is not known, 𝑏𝑏 and ℎ shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimension minus
three times the thickness. The thickness, 𝑡𝑡, shall be taken as the design wall thickness, in
accordance with AISC Section B4.1.

Filled Composite Sections 29

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

Table 3-1: Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios of Compression Elements for Classification Sections
– Members Subjected to Flexure With or Without Axial Force
Width- Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for
Thickness Compression Element
Section Description AISC Ratio, Compact NonCompact Slender
Type of Element Example Ref. (𝝀𝝀) �𝝀𝝀𝒑𝒑 � (𝝀𝝀𝒓𝒓 ) (𝝀𝝀𝒔𝒔 )
Flange in
flexural or
axial 𝑏𝑏 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
I1.1b 2.26� 3.00� 5.00�
compression 𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦

under major
Box

axis bending

Web in ℎ 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
I1.1b 3.00� 5.70� 5.70�
flexure 𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦

Flexural 𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
Pipe

I1.1b 0.09 0.31 0.31

𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
compression

Refer to Table 3-1 and Table 3-2 (AISC Table I1.1a, I1.1b) for the graphic representation of
stiffened element dimensions.

Table 3-2: Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios of Compression Elements for Classification Sections
– Members Subjected to Axial Force
Width- Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for
Thickness Compression Element
Section Description AISC Ratio, Compact NonCompact Slender
Type of Element Example Ref. (𝝀𝝀) �𝝀𝝀𝒑𝒑 � (𝝀𝝀𝒓𝒓 ) (𝝀𝝀𝒔𝒔 )

Flange in
𝑏𝑏 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
axial I1.1a 2.26� 3.00� 5.00�
𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
Compression
Box

Web in axial ℎ 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
I1.1a 2.26� 3.00� 5.00�
compression 𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦

Axial 𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸
Pipe

I1.1a 0.15 0.19 0.31

𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
compression

The design wall thickness, 𝑡𝑡, for hollow structural sections, such as Box and Pipe sections, is
modified for the welding process (AISC B4.2). If the welding process is ERW (Electric-

Filled Composite Sections 30

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

Resistance Welding), the thickness is reduced by a factor of 0.93. However, if the welding
process is SAW (Submerged Arc Welded), the thickness is not reduced. The Overwrites can be
used to choose if the thickness of HSS sections should be reduced for ERW on a member-by-
member basis. The Overwrites can also be used to change the reduction factor.

In classifying web slenderness of Encased I-Shapes, Filled Box, and Filled Pipe Sections, it is
assumed that there are no intermediate stiffeners.

Stress check of Too Slender sections is beyond the scope of this program.

3.5.2 Calculation of Nominal Strengths

3.5.2.1 Nominal Tensile Strength

This section applies to the members subject to axial tension.

Although there is no maximum slenderness limit for members designed to resist tension forces,
the slenderness ratio preferably should not exceed 300 (AISC D1). A warning message to that
effect is printed for such slender elements under tension.

The design tensile strength, ϕ𝑡𝑡 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable tensile strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑡𝑡 of tension members
is taken according to the limit states of yielding of gross section under tension as follows.
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC I2-14)
ϕ𝑡𝑡 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I2.2c)
Ω𝑡𝑡 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I2.2c)
For filled sections, rebar cannot be specified in the program. That makes 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 0.

3.5.2.2 Nominal Compressive Strength

The design compressive strength, ϕ𝑐𝑐 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable compressive strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑐𝑐 of
members subject to axial compression are addressed in this section. The resistance and safety
factors used in calculation of design and allowable compressive strengths are:
ϕ𝑐𝑐 = 0.75 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I2.2c)
Ω𝑐𝑐 = 2.00 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I2.2c)
Although there is no maximum slenderness limit for members designed to resist compression
forces, the slenderness ratio preferably should not exceed 200 (AISC E2). A warning message to
that effect is given for such slender elements under compression.

For compression members with Filled Box and Filled Pipe sections, the nominal compressive
strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , is given by
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
�0.658 𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 � 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≤ 2.25
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 = � (AISC I2-2, I2-3, I2.1b)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
0.877𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 > 2.25
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒

where 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 is taken as follows:

Filled Composite Sections 31

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

⎧ 2
⎪ 𝜆𝜆−𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 − �𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 − 𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦 � � � 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC I2.2b)
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 −𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝
⎨ 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠
⎪ ′
⎩𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐 �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 � 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐸𝐸
𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐶𝐶2 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠 � (AISC I2-9b)
𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐
𝐸𝐸
𝑃𝑃𝑦𝑦 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠 � (AISC I2-9d)
𝐸𝐸 𝑐𝑐
9𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠 ⁄(𝑏𝑏/𝑡𝑡)2 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 = � 𝐷𝐷 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 0.2 (AISC I2-10, I2-11)
0.72𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 ��� � � �� 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑡𝑡 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠
0.85 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐶𝐶2 = � (AISC I2.2b)
0.95 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝜆𝜆 = Plate slenderness ratio, or width-to-thickness ratio of the most slender plate
𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 = The limit of the plate width-to-thickness ratio between compact and noncompact
sections (AISC Table I1.1a) = 2.26�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 = The limit of the plate width-to-thickness ratio between noncompact and slender
sections (AISC Table I1.1a) = 3.00�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 = elastic critical buckling load, kips
= 𝜋𝜋 2 (𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 )𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 /(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)2 (AISC I2-5)
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 = area of concrete, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 = area of the steel section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 = modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = effective stiffness of composite section, 𝑘𝑘 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
= 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠 + 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝐶𝐶3 𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 (AISC I2-12)
𝐶𝐶3 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite compression
members
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
= 0.45 + 3 � � ≤ 0.9 (AISC I2-13)
𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔
𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠 = modulus of elasticity of steel
= 29,000 ksi
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 = specified minimum yield stress of steel section, ksi
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars, ksi (assumed zero)
𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖4
𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠 = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of the composite
section, in4
𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, in4 (assumed zero)
𝐾𝐾 = effective length factor = 𝐾𝐾2
𝐿𝐿 = laterally unbraced length of the member, in.
𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi

In the determination, the effective length factor 𝐾𝐾2 is used as the 𝐾𝐾-factor. If the chosen analysis
method in the Preferences is the General Second Order Elastic Analysis, the First Order Analysis
using Amplified First Order Analysis, or the Limited First Order Analysis, the calculated 𝐾𝐾2

Filled Composite Sections 32

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

factors are used. If the user overwrites the 𝐾𝐾2 factors, the overwritten values are used. If the
chosen analysis method is one of any of the Direct Analysis Methods, the effective length factor,
𝐾𝐾, for calculation of 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 is taken as one (AISC C3). The overwritten values of 𝐾𝐾2 will have no
effect for the latter case.

The available compressive strength need not be less than that specified for the bare steel member
as required by Chapter E.

3.5.3 Nominal Flexure Strength

This section applies to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis. The members
are assumed to be loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that passes through the shear center
or restrained against twisting.
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛
The design flexural strength, 𝜙𝜙𝑏𝑏 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable flexural strength, are determined using
Ω𝑏𝑏
the following resistance and safety factors:
ϕ𝑏𝑏 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I3.3, I3.4b)
Ω𝑏𝑏 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I3.3, I3.4b)
This section applies to compact, noncompact, or slender sections. The program uses the same set
of formulas for both major and minor direction bending, but with appropriate parameters.

The nominal flexural strength for Filled Box sections is calculated as follows:
𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝜆𝜆−𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 = �𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 − �𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 − 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 � � � 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC I4.4b)
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 −𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
where:
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 = moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over the composite section,
kip-in. The plastic capacity of the section is calculated assuming a perfectly plastic
stress distribution with the maximum concrete compressive stress limited to
0.70𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ , no tension in concrete, and the maximum steel stress limited to 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 both in
tension and compression. See the stress block in Figure 3-3.
𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 = yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension flange and first yield of the
compression flange, kip-in. The capacity at first yield is calculated assuming a
linear elastic stress distribution with the maximum concrete compressive stress
limited to 0.70𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ , no tension in concrete, and the maximum steel stress limited to
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 . See the stress block in Figure 3-3.
𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = yield moment corresponding to first yielding of the tension flange or first reaching
the local buckling stress, 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 , of the compression flange, whichever comes first,
kip-in. The capacity at first yield is calculated assuming a linear elastic stress
distribution with the maximum concrete compressive stress limited to 0.70𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ , no
tension in concrete, and the maximum steel stress limited to 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 .
𝜆𝜆 = Plate slenderness ratio or width-to-thickness ratio of the most slender plate.

Filled Composite Sections 33

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 = The limit of plate width-to-thickness ratio between compact and noncompact
sections (AISC Table I1.1b)
2.26�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓) 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
= � 3.00�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤) 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
0.09𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 = The limit of plate width-to-thickness ratio between noncompact and slender
sections (AISC Table I1.1b)
3.00�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓) 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
= � 5.70�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤) 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
0.31𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
9𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠
⎧ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
⎪ (𝑏𝑏/𝑡𝑡)
2

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.72𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (AISC I2-10, I3.4b)

⎨ 0.2 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
⎪��𝐷𝐷 � 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �
⎩ 𝑡𝑡 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠

The plastic moment capacity, 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 , is calculated as follows (AISC I4.4b, C-I4.4, Figure C-13.7):
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑀𝑀𝐷𝐷 − 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � � 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 = � 2
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � � 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
2
where:
0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑀𝑀𝐷𝐷 = � 2
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
2
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 = full x axis plastic section modulus of HSS
𝑏𝑏 ℎ2
⎧ 𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖 − 0.429𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖2 ℎ𝑖𝑖 + 0.192𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖3 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐 = 4
⎨ ℎ3
⎩ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
6
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 2𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑛𝑛2
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 ℎ𝑛𝑛2
⎧ 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 ℎ𝑖𝑖
⎪2�0.85𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑏𝑏 + 4𝐹𝐹 𝑡𝑡� ≤ 2 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
ℎ𝑛𝑛 = 𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦
⎨ ℎ 𝜋𝜋 − 𝜃𝜃
⎪ 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � � 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
⎩ 2 2
𝑑𝑑 3 − ℎ3 𝜃𝜃
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � �
6 2
ℎ3 3� �
𝜃𝜃
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
6 2
0.0260𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 − 2𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠 �(0.0260𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 + 2𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠 )2 + 0.857𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠
𝜃𝜃 = + (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟)
0.0848𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 0.0848𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐
𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 = 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ℎ2
𝑑𝑑−𝑡𝑡
𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 � � 𝑡𝑡 (thin HSS wall assumed)
2

Filled Composite Sections 34

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

In the preceding expression, the effects of corner radius are considered.

2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐻𝐻𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 +0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓

Neutral axis location for force equilibrium: 𝑎𝑎𝑝𝑝 =
4𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 +0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖
(a) Compact composite section – stress block for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝

2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐻𝐻𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 +0.35𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓

Neutral axis location for force equilibrium: 𝑎𝑎𝑦𝑦 =
4𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 +0.35𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖
(b) Noncompact composite section – stress block for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐻𝐻𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 +�0.35𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ +𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 −𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓

Neutral axis location for force equilibrium: 𝑎𝑎𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 =
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 +𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �+0.35𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖
(c) Slender-element composite section – stress blocks for calculating first yield moment 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Figure 3-3: Stress Blocks for Calculating Nominal Flexural Strength of Filled Box Sections

Filled Composite Sections 35

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

The expressions to calculate 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 and 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 of the Filled Box sections are not presented here.
However, those are calculated based on the stress distribution given in Figure 3-3(b) and Figure
3-3(c). While calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 and 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 , the effects of the corner radius are ignored.

0.85 f c′ Fy
B
r
t
H hi
C
L

t
bi

Figure 3-4: Filled Rectangular or Square HSS, Strong-Axis Anchor Points

0.85 f c′ Fy

d 2

C
L

Figure 3-5: Filled Rectangular or Square HSS, Strong-Axis Anchor Points

0.85 f c′ Fy

PNA
hn
C
L

Figure 3-6: Filled Rectangular or Square HSS, Strong-Axis Anchor Points

𝑡𝑡 = 0.93𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 , in.
𝐵𝐵 = Overall width of shorter side, in.
𝐻𝐻 = Overall width of longer side, in.
𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 = Inside width of shorter side, in
= 𝐵𝐵 − 2𝑡𝑡
ℎ𝑖𝑖 = Inside width of longer side, in.

Filled Composite Sections 36

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

= 𝐻𝐻 − 2𝑡𝑡
𝑏𝑏 = Width of stiffened compression element on shorter side, in.
= 𝐵𝐵 − 3𝑡𝑡 in accordance with AISC Specification Section B4.1b(d)
ℎ = Width of stiffened compression element on longer side, in.
= 𝐻𝐻 − 3𝑡𝑡 in accordance with AISC Specification Section B4.1b(d)
𝑟𝑟 = 1.5𝑡𝑡 for 𝑏𝑏/𝑡𝑡 and ℎ/𝑡𝑡, in.
= 2.0𝑡𝑡 for all area, modulus, and moment of inertia calculations, in.
0.95 f c′ Fy

d C
L

t
h

C
L

PNA
hn θ
C
L

Figure 3-7: Filled Round HSS Anchor Points

𝑡𝑡 = 0.93𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 , in.
𝑑𝑑 = outside diameter of round HSS, in.
ℎ = inside diameter of round HSS, in.
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 = plastic section modulus of steel shape = 𝑑𝑑 3 ⁄6 − 𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐 = ℎ3 ⁄6

Filled Composite Sections 37

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

For Filled Pipe sections, the values of 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 and 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 are calculated by direct integration of stresses
as shown in Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9. More details and solution derivation of the integrals can
be found in Appendix B.

(a) Filled Pipe section – stress block for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

(b) Compression part of Filled Pipe for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

(c) Tension part of Filled Pipe for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

Figure 3-8: Filled Pipe Section stress profile to compute 𝑴𝑴𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄
For calculation of 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 , the location of the neutral axis must be determined by equating the total
compressive force contributed by concrete and steel section, and the tensile force by the steel
section. The compressive force of the circular segment above the neutral axis as shown in Figure
3-8: Filled Pipe Section stress profile to compute 𝑴𝑴𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄 (b) is computed by the triple integral:
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑉𝑉1 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0

Filled Composite Sections 38

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1

= � (𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥3

The concrete compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is then equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The steel compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The steel tensile force, 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 )
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0

In above equations of forces, 𝑥𝑥2 = ℎ⁄2, 𝑥𝑥3 = 𝑑𝑑 ⁄2, and the neutral axis location, 𝑥𝑥1 , is solved
iteratively. With 𝑥𝑥1 determined, the moments are calculated as follows:
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The moment of concrete in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The steel compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The steel tensile force, 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 )
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The moment strength 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is the sum of all moment strengths:

𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠

Filled Composite Sections 39

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

The 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 is computed in similar manner with the following stress profile:

(a) Filled Pipe section – stress block for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦

(b) Tension part of Filled Pipe for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦

Figure 3-9: Filled Pipe Section stress profile to compute 𝑴𝑴𝒚𝒚

The concrete compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is then equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The steel compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The steel tensile force, 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 )
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0

where:
𝑥𝑥4 = −𝑥𝑥1 + (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 )
1 2 1
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑟𝑟 (2𝛽𝛽 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛽𝛽 ) − (𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡)2 (2𝛼𝛼 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛼𝛼 )
2 2

Filled Composite Sections 40

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑥𝑥
𝛽𝛽 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � 4 � (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟)
𝑟𝑟
−1 � 𝑥𝑥4 �
𝛼𝛼 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟)
𝑟𝑟−𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡 = thickness of the steel pipe section
𝑟𝑟 = radius of the steel pipe section

The moment of concrete in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The moment of steel in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0

The moment of steel in tension, 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 )
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0

where
𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠1 (𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 + 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐1 ) − 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠2 (𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 + 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐2 )
2𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠3 𝛽𝛽 𝜋𝜋
⎧ 𝑟𝑟 � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐� 𝛽𝛽 >
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐1 = 3(𝛽𝛽 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ) 4
⎨ 2( 2 4)
𝜋𝜋
⎩0.2𝑟𝑟𝛽𝛽 1 − 0.0619𝛽𝛽 + 0.0027𝛽𝛽 𝛽𝛽 ≤
4
1 2
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠1 = 𝑟𝑟 (2𝛽𝛽 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛽𝛽 )
2
𝑥𝑥4
𝛽𝛽 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � �
𝑟𝑟
2𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠3 𝛼𝛼 𝜋𝜋
⎧ (𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡) � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐� 𝛼𝛼 >
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐1 = 3(𝛼𝛼 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ) 4
⎨ 𝜋𝜋
( ) 2( 2 4)
⎩0.2 𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡 𝛼𝛼 1 − 0.0619𝛼𝛼 + 0.0027𝛼𝛼 𝛼𝛼 ≤
4
1 2
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠2 = (𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡) (2𝛼𝛼 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛼𝛼 )
2
𝑥𝑥4
𝛼𝛼 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � �
𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡

The moment strength 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 is the sum of all moment strengths:

𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠

3.5.4 Nominal Shear Strength

The nominal shear strengths are calculated for shears along the geometric axes for all sections.
For Filled Box and Filled Pipe sections the principal axes coincide with their geometric axes.

Filled Composite Sections 41

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

The design shear strength, ϕ𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable shear strength, 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 ⁄Ω𝑣𝑣 are determined using
the following factors.

ϕ𝑣𝑣 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I4.2)

Ω𝑣𝑣 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I4.2)
The available strength of the composite section is taken as the available shear strength of the steel
section and concrete infill (AISC I4.2).

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 = 0.6𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 + 0.06𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (AISC I4-1)

where
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 = shear area of steel section of the composite member.
2ℎ𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
= �
2𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 /𝜋𝜋 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝐻𝐻 − 3𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
ℎ = �
𝐵𝐵 − 3𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑡𝑡 = �
𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑆𝑆ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝐻𝐻 = overall height of the steel box section.
𝐵𝐵 = overall width of the steel box section.
𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 = thickness of the flange of the steel box section.
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 = thickness of the web of the steel box section.
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 = area of pipe section.
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 = area of concrete infill.
For noncompact section:
𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 = 1
For compact box section:
𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
⎧ 1 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ≥ 0.7
⎪ 𝑑𝑑
⎪ 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
(10 − 1) � − 0.5� 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 = 𝑑𝑑
⎨1 + 0.7 − 0.5
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.5 ≤
𝑑𝑑
< 0.7
⎪
⎪ 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
⎩ 10 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 < 0.5
𝑑𝑑

For compact pipe section:

𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
⎧ 1 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ≥ 0.7
⎪ 𝑑𝑑
⎪ 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
(9 − 1) � − 0.5� 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝐾𝐾𝑐𝑐 = 𝑑𝑑
⎨1 + 0.7 − 0.5
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.5 ≤
𝑑𝑑
< 0.7
⎪
⎪ 𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 /𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
⎩ 9 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 < 0.5
𝑑𝑑

𝑑𝑑 = depth of the steel section in direction of bending.

𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 = maximum required moment along the member length in direction of bending.
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 = maximum required shear along the member length in direction of bending.

Filled Composite Sections 42

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

3.5.5 Nominal Torsional Strength

The nominal torsion strengths are calculated for closed sections such as Filled Boxes and Filled
Pipes only. Torsion is ignored in design for all other section types. Concrete is ignored while
calculating the torsional strength.
𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛
The design torsional strength, 𝜙𝜙 𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable torsional strength, are determined using
Ω𝑇𝑇
the following resistance and safety factors:
ϕ 𝑇𝑇 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC H3.1)
Ω 𝑇𝑇 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC H3.1)
The nominal torsional strength, 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 , according to the limit states of torsional yielding and torsional
buckling, is as follows:
𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐶𝐶 (AISC H3-1)
where 𝐶𝐶 is the torsional shear constant, and 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is the critical buckling stress.
3
2(𝐵𝐵 − 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 )�𝐻𝐻 − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ��𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 , 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �� − 4.5(4 − 𝜋𝜋) ��𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 , 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �� � 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝐶𝐶 = � )2
𝜋𝜋(𝐷𝐷 − 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
2
(AISC H3.1 Note)
For Filled Pipe sections:
⎧ ⎫
1.23𝐸𝐸 0.60𝐸𝐸
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 , ≤ 0.6𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (AISC H3-2a, H3-2b)
⎨ 𝐿𝐿 𝐷𝐷 5/4 𝐷𝐷 3/2 ⎬
� � 𝑡𝑡 �
⎩ 𝐷𝐷 � 𝑡𝑡 � ⎭

Where:
𝐿𝐿 = torsional unbraced length of the member, 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 . This length is taken as the minor
direction unbraced length for flexural buckling, 𝐿𝐿22 , by default. However, this length
can be overwritten in the program.
𝐷𝐷 = outside diameter of the Pipe section
𝑡𝑡 = design wall thickness
For Filled Box sections:
⎧ 0.6𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ℎ/𝑡𝑡 ≤ 2.45�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
⎪
⎪
0.6𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2.45�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2.45�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 < ℎ/𝑡𝑡 ≤ 3.07�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (AISC H3-2a, H3-2b)
⎨ ℎ/𝑡𝑡
⎪
⎪ 0.458𝜋𝜋 2 𝐸𝐸
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 3.07�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 < ℎ/𝑡𝑡 ≤ 260
⎩ (ℎ/𝑡𝑡)2

In calculating ℎ/𝑡𝑡, the maximum of the ratio of depth- to-thickness and width-to-thickness is
considered.

Here 𝑡𝑡 is the design thickness. The design wall thickness is equal to 0.93 times the nominal wall
thickness for ERW HSS and equal to the nominal wall thickness for SAW HSS. However, the

Filled Composite Sections 43

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

choice of thickness reduction and the reduction factor can be overwritten in the program on a
member-by-member basis.

3.6 Encased Composite Sections

3.6.1 Classification for Local Buckling

The nominal strengths for flexure and axial compression are dependent on the classification of
the section as Compact, Noncompact, Slender, or Too Slender. Compact sections are capable of
developing full plastic strength before local buckling occurs. Non-compact sections can develop
partial yielding in compression and buckle inelastically before reaching a fully plastic stress
distribution. Slender sections buckle elastically before any of the elements yield under
compression.

The Encased I-Shapes are always considered to be compact (AISC I1.2).

3.6.2 Calculation of Nominal Strengths

3.6.2.1 Nominal Tensile Strength

This section applies to the members subject to axial tension.

Although there is no maximum slenderness limit for members designed to resist tension forces,
the slenderness ratio preferably should not exceed 300 (AISC D1). A warning message to that
effect is printed for such slender elements under tension.

The design tensile strength, ϕ𝑡𝑡 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable tensile strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑡𝑡 of tension members
is taken in accordance with the limit states of yielding of the gross section under tension as
follows:
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC I2-8)
ϕ𝑡𝑡 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I2.1c)
Ω𝑡𝑡 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I2.1c)

3.6.2.2 Load Transfer

Load transfer requirements for encased composite members shall be determined in accordance
with Section 16. The program currently does not check Load Transfer requirements.

3.6.2.3 Nominal Compressive Strength

The design compressive strength, ϕ𝑐𝑐 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable compressive strength, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑐𝑐 of
members subject to axial compression are addressed in this section. The resistance and safety
factors used in calculation of design and allowable compressive strengths are:
ϕ𝑐𝑐 = 0.75 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I2.1b, I2.2b)
Ω𝑐𝑐 = 2.00 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I2.1b, I2.2b)
Although there is no maximum slenderness limit for members designed to resist compression

Encased Composite Sections 44

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

forces, the slenderness ratio preferably should not exceed 200 (AISC E2). A warning message to
that effect is given for such slender elements under compression.

The nominal compressive strength of members of doubly symmetric axially loaded encased
composite sections, 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 , is the value obtained in accordance with the limit state of flexural
buckling. The torsional and flexural-torsional buckling limit states do not need to be considered.
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
�0.658 𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 � 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≤ 2.25
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 = � (AISC I2-2, I2-3, I2.1b)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
0.877𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 > 2.25
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒
Where:
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 (AISC I2-4)
𝑃𝑃𝑒𝑒 = elastic critical buckling load, kips
= 𝜋𝜋 2 (𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 )𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 /(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)2 (AISC I2-5)
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 = area of concrete, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 = area of the steel section, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 = modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in2
= 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠 + 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝐶𝐶1 𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 (AISC I2-12)
𝐶𝐶1 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of encased composite compression
members
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
= 0.25 + 3 � � ≤ 0.7 (AISC I2-13)
𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔

𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠 = modulus of elasticity of steel

= 29,000 ksi
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 = specified minimum yield stress of steel section, ksi
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars, ksi (assumed zero)
𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, in4
𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠 = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of the composite
section, in4
𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, in4 (assumed zero)
𝐾𝐾 = effective length factor = 𝐾𝐾2
𝐿𝐿 = laterally unbraced length of the member, in.
𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi

In the determination, the effective length factor 𝐾𝐾2 is used as the 𝐾𝐾 -factor. If the chosen analysis
method in the Preferences is the General Second Order Elastic Analysis, the First Order Analysis
using Amplified First Order Analysis, or the Limited First Order Analysis, the calculated 𝐾𝐾2
factors are used. If the user overwrites the 𝐾𝐾2 factors, the overwritten values are used. If the
chosen analysis method is one of any of the Direct Analysis Methods, the effective length factor,
𝐾𝐾, for calculation of 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 is taken as one (AISC C3). The overwritten values of 𝐾𝐾2 will have no
effect for the latter case.

Encased Composite Sections 45

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

3.6.3 Nominal Flexure Strength

This section applies to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis. The members
are assumed to be loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that passes through the shear center
or restrained against twisting.

The design flexural strength, 𝜙𝜙𝑏𝑏 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable flexural strength, 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 ⁄Ω𝑏𝑏 are determined
using the following resistance and safety factors:
ϕ𝑏𝑏 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC I3.3, I3.4b)
Ω𝑏𝑏 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC I3.3, I3.4b)

3.6.3.1 Encased-I Rectangular Sections

The nominal plastic moment capacity for bending in the major axis, 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 , for Encased-I
Rectangular sections is calculated as follows (AISC I3.3c, I3.4b, C-I3.3):

𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑀𝑀𝐷𝐷 − 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � �
2
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = ℎ1 ℎ22 − 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
Where:
𝑍𝑍
𝑀𝑀𝐷𝐷 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑟𝑟 + 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝑐𝑐 �
2
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 = full x axis plastic section modulus of steel I-shape
𝑍𝑍𝑟𝑟 = full x axis plastic section modulus of longitudinal reinforcement
= ∑ 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑖
ℎ1 ℎ22
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐 = − 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 − 𝑍𝑍𝑟𝑟
4
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = area of longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖
𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑖 = distance from longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 to the centroid of the section

The computation of ℎ𝑛𝑛 and 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 depends on the position of plastic neutral axis (PNA) and those
parameters are computed as given below:

Figure 3-10: Stress Blocks for Calculating Nominal Flexural Strengths of

Encased I Rectangular Sections in Major Direction

Encased Composite Sections 46

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 below the flanges �ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �
2

0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ) − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

ℎ𝑛𝑛 =
2�0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (ℎ1 − 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ) + 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ℎ𝑛𝑛2
𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the flange � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 < ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ �
2 2

0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 − 𝑑𝑑𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 − 𝑑𝑑𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 � − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
ℎ𝑛𝑛 =
2�0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �ℎ1 − 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 � + 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �
𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 − 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � � + ℎ𝑛𝑛 �
2 2
𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 above the flange �ℎ𝑛𝑛 > �
2

0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ) − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

ℎ𝑛𝑛 =
2[0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ℎ1 ]
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 i.e., full plastic section modulus of steel section about x-axis.
where
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is within the region of 2ℎ𝑛𝑛

For minor direction of bending, the plastic moment capacity, 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝 , is calculated as follows (AISC
I3.3c, C-I3.3):
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑀𝑀𝐷𝐷 − 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � �
2
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = ℎ1 ℎ22 − 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
where
𝑍𝑍
𝑀𝑀𝐷𝐷 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑍𝑍𝑟𝑟 + 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝑐𝑐 �
2
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 = full y axis plastic section modulus of steel I-shape
𝑍𝑍𝑟𝑟 = full y axis plastic section modulus of longitudinal reinforcement
= ∑ 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑖
ℎ1 ℎ𝑛𝑛2
𝑍𝑍𝑐𝑐 = − 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 − 𝑍𝑍𝑟𝑟
4
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = area of longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖
𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑖 = distance from longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 to the centroid of the section

Encased Composite Sections 47

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

Figure 3-11: Stress Blocks for Calculating Nominal Flexural Strengths of

Encased I Rectangular Sections in Minor Direction

The computation of ℎ𝑛𝑛 and 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 depends on the position of the plastic neutral axis (PNA) and
these parameters are computed as follows:
𝑡𝑡
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the web thickness �ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑤𝑤 �
2

0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ) − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

ℎ𝑛𝑛 =
2�0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (ℎ1 − 𝑑𝑑 ) + 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑑𝑑ℎ𝑛𝑛2
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the flange � < ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ �
2 2

0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 � − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 � − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
ℎ𝑛𝑛 =
2�4𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �ℎ1 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ��
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 �
2 2
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 above the flange �ℎ𝑛𝑛 > �
2
0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 ) − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 − 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
ℎ𝑛𝑛 =
2[0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ℎ1 ]
𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑍𝑍𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 i.e., full plastic section modulus of steel section about y-axis.
where
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is within the region of 2ℎ𝑛𝑛

3.6.3.2 Encased-I Circular Sections

The nominal flexural strength for bending about major axis of the Encased-I Circular sections is
calculated in a similar manner as for Encased-I Rectangular sections but the location of neutral
axis is determined iteratively as described below.

Encased Composite Sections 48

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

Figure 3-12: Stress Blocks for Calculating Nominal Flexural Strengths of

Encased I Rectangular Sections in Major Direction

𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 below the flanges �ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �
2
𝑑𝑑
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 − 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 − 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
2
𝑑𝑑
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �
2
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑑𝑑
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �
2
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the flange � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 < ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ �
2 2

𝑑𝑑
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 − �𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − �ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ��� 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 − 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
2

𝑑𝑑
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 ��𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − �ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ��� 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 �
2

𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

𝑑𝑑
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 ��ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �� 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 + 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + �𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �
2

𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡

𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 above the flange �ℎ𝑛𝑛 > �
2

𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ [𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 − 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ]

𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 0

Encased Composite Sections 49

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
where
1 2
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 = 𝑟𝑟 (2𝜃𝜃 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝜃𝜃)
2
ℎ
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � 𝑛𝑛 �
𝑟𝑟
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in compression
𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in tension

The location of neutral axis is determined iteratively by equating the total compressive and
tensile forces:
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 + 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
The nominal flexural strength is the total moment contribution from all components
�𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � calculated as follows:
𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 below the flange �ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �
2
𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � − − ℎ𝑛𝑛 �
2 2
𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓
𝑑𝑑 − − ℎ𝑛𝑛
− 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �2 2 � − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖
2 2
𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓
𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑑𝑑 − − ℎ𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � − − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �2 2 �
2 2 2 2

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓
𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑑𝑑 − + ℎ𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � − + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � + � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �2 2 ��
2 2 2 2

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the flange � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 < ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ �
2 2
2
𝑑𝑑
�𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − �ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ���
2
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖
2
2
𝑑𝑑
�𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − �ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ���
2
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
2
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

Encased Composite Sections 50

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � − + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � + 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � ��ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �� + �
2 2 2 2
2
𝑑𝑑
�ℎ𝑛𝑛 − � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ��
+ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 2
2
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖
𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 above the flange �ℎ𝑛𝑛 > �
2

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 0

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 ℎ𝑛𝑛

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

where:
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 = distance from the centroid of the concrete segment in compression to the neutral
axis
2𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠3 𝜃𝜃 𝜋𝜋
𝑟𝑟 � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐� 𝜃𝜃 >
3(𝜃𝜃−𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠) 4
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 = � 𝜋𝜋
0.2𝑟𝑟𝜃𝜃 1 − 0.0619𝜃𝜃 + 0.0027𝜃𝜃 4 )
2( 2
𝜃𝜃 ≤
4
ℎ
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � 𝑛𝑛 �
𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟 = radius of the cross section
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in compression
𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in tension
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = area of the longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 that is in compression
𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = area of the longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 that is in tension
𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖 = distance from center of the reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 to the neutral axis

Encased Composite Sections 51

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

For bending about minor axis, the nominal flexural strength is calculated similarly.

Figure 3-13: Stress Blocks for Calculating Nominal Flexural Strengths of

Encased I Rectangular Sections in Major Direction

For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the web (ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ⁄2)

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 − 2 � − � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑑𝑑 − 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
2 2 2
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � − � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑑𝑑�
2 2 2
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � − � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + � + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑑𝑑�
2 2 2
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the flange � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 < ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ �
2 2

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 − 2 � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 − 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
2
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �
2
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 + 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 ��
2
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 above the flange (ℎ𝑛𝑛 > 𝑑𝑑 ⁄2)
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ [𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 − 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ]

Encased Composite Sections 52

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 0
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
Where:
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in compression
𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in tension

The location of neutral axis is determined iteratively by equating the total compressive and
tensile forces:
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 + 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
The nominal flexural strength is the total moment contribution from all components
�𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � calculated as follows:
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the web (ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ⁄2)
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 −
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 − 2 � − � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � 2 2 + 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ��
2 2 2 2
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
𝑡𝑡 − ℎ𝑛𝑛
− 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑑𝑑 � 2
𝑤𝑤
+ ℎ𝑛𝑛 � − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖
2 2

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 − 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 − ℎ𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � − � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � 2 2 + � + � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑑𝑑 � 2 + ℎ𝑛𝑛 ��
2 2 2 2 2 2

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 − 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 + ℎ𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � − � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � 2 2 + + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � + � + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑑𝑑 � 2 ��
2 2 2 2 2 2

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
For ℎ𝑛𝑛 within the flange � − 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 < ℎ𝑛𝑛 ≤ �
2 2

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝑏𝑏 − ℎ𝑛𝑛
= 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 − 2 � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � 2
𝑓𝑓
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + ℎ𝑛𝑛 �� − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖
2 2

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 − ℎ𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � − ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � 2 + ℎ𝑛𝑛 ��
2 2

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

Encased Composite Sections 53

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓
𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 + ℎ𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 �2 � + ℎ𝑛𝑛 � 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 � 2 � + 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 �𝑑𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 �ℎ𝑛𝑛 �
2 2

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

For ℎ𝑛𝑛 above the flange (ℎ𝑛𝑛 > 𝑑𝑑 ⁄2)

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 − 0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 0

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 ℎ𝑛𝑛

𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖

Where:
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 = distance from the centroid of the concrete segment in compression to the neutral
axis
2𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠3 𝜃𝜃 𝜋𝜋
⎧ 𝑟𝑟 � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐� 𝜃𝜃 >
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐 = 3(𝜃𝜃 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠) 4
⎨ 2 (1
𝜋𝜋
⎩0.2𝑟𝑟𝜃𝜃 − 0.0619𝜃𝜃 2 + 0.0027𝜃𝜃 4 ) 𝜃𝜃 ≤
4
ℎ
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � 𝑛𝑛 �
𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟 = radius of the cross section
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in compression
𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = total area of all longitudinal reinforcement that is in tension
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = area of the longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 that is in compression
𝐴𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = area of the longitudinal reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 that is in tension
𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖 = distance from center of the reinforcement 𝑖𝑖 to the neutral axis

3.6.4 Nominal Shear Strength

The nominal shear strengths are calculated for shears along the geometric axes for all sections.

The available strength of the composite section is taken as the largest available shear strength
considering the steel section alone (AISC I4.1(a)), the reinforced concrete portion with concrete
plus transverse reinforcement (AISC I4.1(b)), and the steel section plus the transverse
reinforcement (AISC I4.1(c)).

The shear strength of the steel section alone (AISC I4.1(a)) is determined in accordance with
AISC Chapter G. In calculating nominal strength for shear, 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 , it is assumed that no intermediate
stiffeners are used to enhance the shear strength of a section (AISC G2-2). The code allows the
use of one of following methods: (a) the limit state of shear yielding and shear buckling without
using tension-field-action (AISC G2); and (b) post buckling strength of the member or tension-

Encased Composite Sections 54

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

field-action (AISC G3). The program uses the first method to calculate shear strengths.

The design shear strength, ϕ𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 , and the allowable shear strength, 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 ⁄Ω𝑣𝑣 are determined using
the following factors.

For all sections in both the major and minor directions, except for the web of rolled I-Shaped
members with ℎ/𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ≤ 2.24�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 :
ϕ𝑣𝑣 = 0.90 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC G1(a), I4.1(a)))
Ω𝑣𝑣 = 1.67 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC G1(a), I4.1(a)))
For the web of rolled I-Shaped members with ℎ/𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ≤ 2.24�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 and for major direction shear
only:
ϕ𝑣𝑣 = 1.00 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) (AISC G2.1a, I4.1(a))
Ω𝑣𝑣 = 1.50 (𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) (AISC G2.1a, I4.1(a))

3.6.4.1 Shear in the Major Direction

3.6.4.1.1 Steel Section
The nominal shear strength for the major direction, V𝑛𝑛2 , is evaluated in accordance with the limit
states of shear yielding and shear buckling.

V𝑛𝑛2 = 0.6𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣1 (AISC G2-1, I4.1(a))

where 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 is the area of the web (overall depth times the web thickness, 𝑑𝑑𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ), and 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣1 is the web
shear coefficient. The expressions of 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 and 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣1 differ from section to section, as explained in
the following subsections.

For all I-shaped members, 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 is taken as the overall depth of the member times the web thickness:

𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 = 𝑑𝑑𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 (AISC G2.1(b), I4.1(a))

For the webs of rolled I-shaped members with ℎ/𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ≤ 2.24�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 :

𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣1 = 1 (AISC G2-2, I4.1(a))

For webs of all other I-shaped members, including both singly and doubly symmetric and both
rolled and welded sections, 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣 is calculated as follows:

⎧ ℎ 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸
1.0 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ≤ 1.10�
⎪ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
⎪
𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣1 = 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸 (AISC G2-3, G2-4, G2-5, I4.1(a))
⎨ 1.10� 𝐹𝐹
𝑦𝑦
⎪ ℎ 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 > 1.10�
⎪ ℎ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
⎩ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

where 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 is the web plate bucking coefficient and it is taken as:

𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 = 5.34 (AISC G2.1(b)(i), I4.1(a))

Encased Composite Sections 55

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

In the preceding expression, for rolled shapes, ℎ is taken as the clear distance between flanges
less the fillet or corner radii, and for built-up welded sections, ℎ, is taken as the clear distance
between flanges (AISC G2.1(b), B4.2).

It should be observed that the ϕ𝑣𝑣 factor, also the Ω𝑣𝑣 factor, differs for the web of rolled I-shaped
members with ℎ/𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 ≤ 2.24�𝐸𝐸/𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 from the web of other I-shaped members.

3.6.4.1.2 Concrete Plus Transverse Reinforcement

Given the design force set 𝑃𝑃𝑢𝑢 and V𝑢𝑢 , the shear force carried by the concrete, V𝑐𝑐 , is calculated as
follows (ACI 10.5.3.1):
• If the column is provided with the minimum shear rebar, i.e. 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ≥ 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢
⎧ �2𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ + � 𝐴𝐴
⎪ 6𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (ACI 22.5.5.1(a), 22.5.5.1(b))
⎨ 1/3
𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢
⎪�8𝜆𝜆(𝜌𝜌𝑤𝑤 ) �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ + � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
⎩ 6𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔

• If the column is not provided with the minimum shear rebar, i.e. 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 < 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 = �8𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 𝜆𝜆(𝜌𝜌𝑤𝑤 )1/3 �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ + � 𝐴𝐴 (ACI 22.5.5.1(c))
6𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

The term 𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢 ⁄𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 must have 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 units. Compression is considered positive. An upper limit on
𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢 ⁄6𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 are imposed:
𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢 ⁄6𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 ≤ 0.05𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (ACI 22.5.5.1.2)
An upper and a lower limit on 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 are imposed:
𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 ≥ 0 (ACI 22.5.5.1, Table 22.5.5.1 Note [2])

𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 ≤ �5𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ � 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (ACI 22.5.5.1.1)

The size effect modification factor, 𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 , is given by the following:

2 (ACI 22.5.5.1.3)
𝜆𝜆𝑠𝑠 = � ≤1
𝑑𝑑
1+
10

Given 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 and 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 , the required shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups or ties within a
spacing, 𝑠𝑠, is given for rectangular and circular columns by the following:
• The shear strength of the member is limited to a maximum of:

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 + 8�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (ACI 11.4.7.9)

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣
• The required shear reinforcement per unit spacing, , is calculated as follows:
𝑠𝑠

If 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 ≤ (𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 ⁄2)𝜙𝜙,

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ⁄𝑠𝑠 = 0 (ACI 11.4.6.1)

Encased Composite Sections 56

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

else if (𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 ⁄2)𝜙𝜙 < 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 ≤ 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 (𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 ) (ACI 11.1.1, 11.4.7.2)
=
𝑠𝑠 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 0.75�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 50 (ACI 11.4.6.3)

≥ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 , 𝑏𝑏 �
𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑤𝑤

else if 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 > 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

a failure condition is declared. (ACI 11.4.7.9)
In the preceding expressions, for a rectangular section, 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 is the width of the column, 𝑑𝑑 is the
effective depth of the column, and 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is the effective shear area, which is equal to (𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 𝑑𝑑 − 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 )
where 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 is the area of the steel section. For a circular section, 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 is replaced with 𝐷𝐷, which is
the external diameter of the column, 𝑑𝑑 is replaced with 0.8𝐷𝐷 (ACI 22.5.2.2), and 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is taken as
�𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 − 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 � as 𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔 = 𝜋𝜋𝐷𝐷2 ⁄4 = 0.7854𝐷𝐷2 < 0.8𝐷𝐷2 = 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 𝑑𝑑 to be conservative. A limit of 100 psi
is imposed on �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ for calculation purposes (ACI 22.5.3.1). And the upper limit of the
reinforcement shear strength, 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 , is taken as 60 ksi for all frames (ACI Table 20.2.2.4a).

3.6.4.1.3 Steel Section Plus Transverse Reinforcement

Given 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 and the nominal shear strength of the steel section 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2 , the required shear
reinforcement in the form of stirrups or ties within a spacing, 𝑠𝑠, is given for rectangular and
circular columns by the following:
• The shear strength of the member is limited to a maximum of:

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2 + 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 + 8�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (ACI 11.4.7.9)

• The required shear reinforcement per unit spacing, 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ⁄𝑠𝑠, is calculated as follows:

If 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 ≤ 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ⁄𝑠𝑠 = 0 (ACI 11.4.6.1)
else if 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2 < 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 ≤ 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 (𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2 ) (ACI 11.1.1, 11.4.7.2)
=
𝑠𝑠 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 0.75�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 50
≥ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 , 𝑏𝑏 � (ACI 11.4.6.3)
𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑤𝑤

else if 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 > 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

a failure condition is declared. (ACI 11.4.7.9)

3.6.4.2 Shear in the Minor Direction

3.6.4.2.1 Steel Section
The nominal shear strength for minor directions, V𝑛𝑛3 , is evaluated in accordance with the limit
states of shear yielding and shear buckling as follows:

Encased Composite Sections 57

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

V𝑛𝑛3 = 0.6𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣2 (AISC G2-1, I4.1(a))

where 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 is the shear area for minor direction shear, and 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣2 is the web shear coefficient. The
expression of 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 and 𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣 differs from section to section as explained in the following subsections.

𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 is taken as the sum of flange areas,

𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 = 2𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 (AISC G2.1(b), I4.1(a))

𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣2 is determined as follows:

⎧ ℎ 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸
1.0 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ≤ 1.10�
⎪ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
⎪
⎪ 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸
⎪ 1.10� 𝐹𝐹
𝑦𝑦
𝐶𝐶𝑣𝑣 = 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸 ℎ 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 1.10� < ≤ 1.37� (AISC G2-3, G2-4, G2-5, I4.1(a))
⎨ ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
⎪ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤
⎪
⎪ 1.51𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
ℎ
> 1.37�
𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 𝐸𝐸
⎪ ℎ 2 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
� � 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
⎩ 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

where ℎ⁄𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 is really meant for flanges and is taken as follows:

ℎ⁄𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 = 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓 ⁄2𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓 (AISC G7, I4.1(a))

and 𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 is taken as 1.2 (AISC G7, I4.1(a))

All dimensions used in the preceding equation are explained in Figure 3-2. For Singly Symmetric
I-Shapes where each flange has its own properties, the shear capacity contribution is calculated
for each flange separately based on its own dimensions, and then the combinations are added
together.

3.6.4.2.2 Concrete Plus Transverse Reinforcement

Similar to Section 3.6.4.1.2 where 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 is the height of the column and 𝑑𝑑 is the effective depth of
the column in minor shear direction along 3-axis (or x-axis).

3.6.4.2.3 Steel Section Plus Transverse Reinforcement

Similar to Section 3.6.4.1.3 with 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛2 replaced by 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛3 and 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 is the height of the column and 𝑑𝑑
is the effective depth of the column in minor shear direction along 3-axis (or x-axis).

3.7 Design of Members for Combined Forces

Previous sections of this design manual address members subject to only one type of force,
namely axial tension, axial compression, flexure or shear. This section addresses the design of
members subject to a combination of two or more of the individual forces.

In the calculation of the demand/capacity (D/C) ratios, first, for each station along the length of

Design of Members for Combined Forces 58

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

the member, the actual member force/moment components are calculated for each design
combination. Then, the corresponding capacities are calculated. Then, the D/C ratios are
calculated at each station for each member under the influence of each of the design combinations.
The controlling D/C ratio is then obtained, along with the associated station and design
combination. A D/C ratio greater than the D/C ratio limit (whose default value is 0.95) indicates
exceeding a limit state.

Currently the program uses the interaction equations of the AISC Section H1.1 for Filled Box and
Filled Pipe sections. Use of the equations is mandatory for noncompact and slender filled sections
(AISC I5). For any Encased Shaped section, more accurate D/C ratio calculation is allowed using
a generic PMM interaction surface (AISC I5).

During the design, the effect of the presence of bolts or welds is not considered.

3.7.1.1 Members Subjected to Flexure and Axial Compression

The interaction of flexure and axial force in all members with compact sections is given as
follows:

For 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 ≥ 0.2

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 8 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 (AISC I5, H1-1a)
+ � + � ≤ 1.0
𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 9 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

For 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 < 0.2

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 (AISC I5, H1-1b)
+� + � ≤ 1.0
2𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 and 𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 are the required and available axial strengths; 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 and 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 are the required and
available flexural strengths; and 3 and 2 represent the strong and weak axes, respectively.

For filled composite sections with noncompact or slender element, the following interaction
equations are also checked:

For 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 ≥ 𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 1 − 𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 (AISC I5, I5-1a)
+ � + � ≤ 1.0
𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑚𝑚 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

For 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 ⁄𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 < 𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝

1 − 𝑐𝑐𝑚𝑚 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 (AISC I5, I5-1b)
� �� � + � + � ≤ 1.0
𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝 𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

Where:
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (AISC I5, I5-2)
𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 =
𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′

Design of Members for Combined Forces 59

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

0.17
⎧ 0.4 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝 = (AISC I5, Table I5.1)
⎨ 0.27 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
⎩𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0.4

For 𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ≥ 0.5:

1.06
⎧ 0.11 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑚𝑚 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC I5, Table I5.1)
⎨ 1.10 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
⎩𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0.08

For 𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 < 0.5:

0.90
⎧ 0.36 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑚𝑚 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (AISC I5, Table I5.1)
⎨ 0.95 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
⎩𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0.32

Depending on the selected design provisions (LRFD or ASD), the terms are defined as follows:

For design in accordance with LRFD provisions:

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 = required axial strength using LRFD load combinations

𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 = design axial strength = 𝜙𝜙𝑐𝑐 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 or = 𝜙𝜙𝑡𝑡 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 = required flexural strength using LRFD load combinations
𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 = design flexural strength =𝜙𝜙𝑏𝑏 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛
𝜙𝜙𝑡𝑡 = resistance factor for tension = 0.90 (AISC I2.1c, 2.2c)
𝜙𝜙𝑐𝑐 = resistance factor for compression = 0.75
𝜙𝜙𝑏𝑏 = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90

For design in accordance with ASD provisions:

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 = required axial strength using ASD load combinations

𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 = allowable axial compressive strength = 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑐𝑐 or = 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑡𝑡
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 = required flexural strength using ASD load combinations
𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 = allowable flexural strength =𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑏𝑏
Ω𝑡𝑡 = safety factor for tension = 1.67 (AISC I2.1c, I2.2c)
Ω𝑐𝑐 = safety factor for compression = 2.0
Ω𝑏𝑏 = safety factor for flexure = 1.67
The program considers the left-hand side to calculate the D/C ratio. The D/C ratio is really
compared with the D/C ratio limit rather than 1. By default, the D/C ratio limit is 0.95. This limit
can be changed in the Preferences.

3.7.1.2 Members Subject to Torsion, Flexure, Shear and Axial Force

The interaction of torsion, flexure, shear, and axial force is considered only for Filled Box and
Filled Pipe sections and only if the torsion is significant. Torsion is considered significant when

Design of Members for Combined Forces 60

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

the required torsional strength, 𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟 , is more than 20% of the available torsional strength, 𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐 (AISC
H3.2). The interaction of torsion with other forces is ignored when

𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟 ≤ 0.2𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐 (AICS H3.2)

and for members with Box sections, the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and axial force is
given by:
2
𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟
+� + �+� + + � ≤ 1.0 (AISC H3-6)
𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐

where, 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 and 𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 are the required and available axial strength; 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 and 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 are required and
available flexural strength; 𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 and 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 are required and available shear strength; and Tr and Tc
are required and available torsional strength, respectively.

For design in accordance with LRFD provisions:

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 = required axial strength using LRFD load combinations

𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 = design compressive/tensile strength = 𝜙𝜙𝑐𝑐 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 or 𝜙𝜙𝑡𝑡 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 = required flexural strength using LRFD load combinations
𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 = design flexural strength = 𝜙𝜙𝑏𝑏 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟 = required shear strength using LRFD load combinations
𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 = desired shear strength = 𝜙𝜙𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛
𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟 = required torsional strength using LRFD load combinations
𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐 = design torsional strength = 𝜙𝜙 𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛
𝜙𝜙𝑐𝑐 = resistance factor for compression = 0.75
𝜙𝜙𝑡𝑡 = resistance factor for tension = 0.9
𝜙𝜙𝑏𝑏 = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
𝜙𝜙𝑣𝑣 = resistance factor for shear = 0.90
𝜙𝜙 𝑇𝑇 = resistance factor for torsion = 0.9

For design in accordance with ASD provisions:

𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟 = required axial strength using ASD load combinations

𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐 = allowable compressive/tensile strength = 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑐𝑐 or 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑡𝑡
𝑀𝑀𝑟𝑟 = required flexural strength using ASD load combinations
𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐 = allowable flexural strength = 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑏𝑏
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟 = required shear strength using ASD load combinations
𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐 = allowable shear strength = 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 /Ω𝑣𝑣
𝑇𝑇𝑟𝑟 = required torsional strength using ASD load combinations
𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐 = allowable torsional strength = 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 /Ω 𝑇𝑇
Ω𝑐𝑐 = safety factor for compression = 2.00
Ω𝑡𝑡 = safety factor for tension = 1.67

Design of Members for Combined Forces 61

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

Ω𝑏𝑏 = safety factor for flexure = 0.90

Ω𝑣𝑣 = safety factor for shear = 0.90
Ω 𝑇𝑇 = safety factor for torsion = 0.90

Design of Members for Combined Forces 62

 Appendix A. P-Delta Effects

Modern design provisions are based on the principle that the member forces are calculated by a
second-order elastic analysis, where the equilibrium is satisfied on the deformed geometry of the
structure. The effects of the loads acting on the deformed geometry of the structure are known as
the second-order or the P-Delta effects.

The P-Delta effects come from two sources: global lateral translation of the frame and the local
deformation of members within the frame.

Consider the frame object shown in Figure A-1, which is extracted from a story level of a larger
structure. The overall global translation of this frame object is indicated by Δ. The local
deformation of the member is shown as δ. The total second order P-Delta effects on this frame
object are those caused by both Δ and δ.

The program has an option to consider P-Delta effects in the analysis. When you consider P-Delta
effects in the analysis, the program does a good job of capturing the effect due to the Δ
deformation (𝑃𝑃 − Δ effect) shown in Figure A-1, but it does not typically capture the effect of the
δ deformation (𝑃𝑃 − δ effect), unless, in the model, the frame object is broken into multiple
elements over its length.

P-Delta Effects 63
Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

∆
Original position of frame
element shown by vertical
line δ
Final deflected position of the
frame element that includes the
global lateral translation, ∆, and
the local deformation of the
Position of frame element
element, δ
as a result of global lateral
translation, ∆, shown by
dashed line
δ

Figure A-1: 𝑷𝑷 − 𝚫𝚫 and 𝑷𝑷 − 𝛅𝛅 effects

In design codes, required strengths are usually required to be determined using a second-order
analysis that considers both 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ effects. Approximate second-order analysis
procedures based on amplification of responses from first-order analysis for calculating the
required flexural and axial strengths are common in current design codes and have the following
general form:

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝐵𝐵1 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵2 𝑀𝑀𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 (AISC A-8-1)

𝑃𝑃𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵2 𝑃𝑃𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 (AISC A-8-2)

where

𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 , 𝑃𝑃𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = Required axial and flexural design capacities

𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 , 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = Required axial and flexural capacities from first-order analysis of the
member assuming there is no translation of the frame (i.e., associated with
the δ deformation in Figure A-1)

𝑀𝑀𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 , 𝑃𝑃𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = Required axial and flexural capacities from first-order analysis of the
member as a result of lateral translation of the frame only (i.e., associated
with the Δ deformation in Figure A-1)

𝐵𝐵1 = Unitless amplification factor multiplying 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

𝐵𝐵2 = Unitless amplification factor multiplying 𝑀𝑀𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 , 𝑃𝑃𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙

Depending on the choice of analysis methods, which is provided by the ANSI/AISC 360-22 code,

Design of Members for Combined Forces 64

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

a rigorous second order analysis or the amplification of first order analysis results to estimate the
effect of second order effects is required. The program has the capability of performing both. In
the first case, the required strengths are determined directly from the analysis results without any
amplification factors (i.e., 𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 are equal to 1). However, these amplification factors can
always be overwritten by the user on a member-by-member basis, if desired, using the overwrite
option.

To properly capture the 𝑃𝑃 − δ effect in a finite element analysis, each element, especially column
elements, must be broken into multiple finite elements. Although a single element per member
can capture the 𝑃𝑃 − δ effect to some extent, the program considers that inadequate. For practical
reasons, the software internally divides the column elements into two members. The user must
provide additional subdivisions where a column is expected to have multiple inflection points.

In general, composite column design requires consideration of P-Delta effects in the analysis
before the check/design is performed. Although two elements per frame object are generally
adequate to capture the 𝑃𝑃 − Δ effect, it is recommended to use more than two elements per frame
object for the cases where both 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ effects are to be considered for a member having
multiple points of inflection. However, explicit manual breaking of the member into elements has
other consequences related to member end moments and unbraced segment end moment. It is
recommended that the members be broken internally by the program. In this way, the member is
recognized as one unit, end of the members is identified properly, and 𝑃𝑃 − Δ and 𝑃𝑃 − δ effects
are captured better.

Design of Members for Combined Forces 65

 Appendix B. Concrete Filled Pipe

For Filled Pipe sections, the values of 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 and 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 are calculated by direct integration of stresses
as shown in Figure B-1 and Figure B-2, respectively.

For calculation of 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 , the location of the neutral axis must be determined by equating the total
compressive force contributed by concrete and steel section, and the tensile force by the steel
section. The compressive force of the circular segment above the neutral axis as shown in Figure
B-1 (b) is computed by the triple integral:
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥 −𝑥𝑥 )
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑉𝑉1 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = 2 � � 𝑧𝑧|0 3 1 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
= � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑦𝑦|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1 0 (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1
𝑥𝑥3
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
= � �𝑥𝑥�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥1 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1
𝑥𝑥
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 1 2 3
2 )2
𝑥𝑥 2
𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥 3

= (
�− 𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥 2
− 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ���
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 2 3 2 𝑥𝑥3 𝑥𝑥
1
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1
= � (𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥3

The concrete compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is then equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1
= � (𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 2 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

The steel compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1
= � (𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥3

Concrete Filled Pipe 66

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1

− � (𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

The steel tensile force, 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 )
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 1 2 3 −𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥1
= � + (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥3 ) 4 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 1 2 3 −𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2 −𝑥𝑥1
− � + (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥3 ) 4 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

(a) Filled Pipe section – stress block for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

(b) Compression part of Filled Pipe for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

(c) Tension part of Filled Pipe for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

Figure B-1: Filled Pipe Section stress profile to compute 𝑴𝑴𝒄𝒄𝒄𝒄

Design of Members for Combined Forces 67

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

ℎ 𝑑𝑑
In above equations, 𝑥𝑥2 = , 𝑥𝑥3 = , and the neutral axis location, 𝑥𝑥1 , is solved iteratively.
2 2

With 𝑥𝑥1 determined, the moments are calculated as follows:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥3
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
= 2� � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑧𝑧|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑦𝑦|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1
𝑥𝑥3
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
= � �𝑥𝑥 2 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥1 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥12 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥34 𝑥𝑥 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3
= � (2𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥32 )�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )2
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 8 8 𝑥𝑥3 3
2 𝑥𝑥3
𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥3 𝑥𝑥
+ 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ���
2 2 𝑥𝑥3 𝑥𝑥
1
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥34 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥34 𝑥𝑥1
= � + − (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥32 )�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥3
2
2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥1
− (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 3 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3

The moment of concrete in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
(𝑥𝑥 −𝑥𝑥 )
= 2� � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑧𝑧|0 2 1 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0
2 2
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥
= � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1 0
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
= � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑦𝑦|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 𝑥𝑥2 2 2
= � �𝑥𝑥 �𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥1 �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥12 �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥1
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥24 𝑥𝑥 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3
= � (2𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥22 )�𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )2
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 8 8 𝑥𝑥2 3
2 𝑥𝑥2
𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥
+ 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ���
2 2 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥
1
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥24 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥24 𝑥𝑥1
= � + − (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥22 )�𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥2
2
2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥1
− (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

The moment of steel in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

Design of Members for Combined Forces 68

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )

𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥 4 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥32
𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥34 𝑥𝑥1 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥1
⎧ � 3+ + (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥32 )�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 3 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 �� ⎫
2𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ⎪ 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥3 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3 ⎪
=
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) ⎨ 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥24 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥24 𝑥𝑥1 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥1 ⎬
⎪− � + + (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥22 )�𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��⎪
⎩ 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥2 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2 ⎭

The moment of steel in tension, 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥3 )
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥 4 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 4 −𝑥𝑥1 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 −𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2 −𝑥𝑥1
⎧ � 3+ + (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥32 )�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 3 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 3 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 �� ⎫
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 ⎪ 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥3 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3 ⎪
=
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥3 ) ⎨ 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥24 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥24
−𝑥𝑥1 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 −𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2
−𝑥𝑥1 ⎬
⎪− � + + (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥22 )�𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��⎪
⎩ 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥2 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2 ⎭

The moment strength 𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is the sum of all moment strengths:

𝑀𝑀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 + 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠

The 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦 is computed in similar manner with the following stress profile:

(a) Filled Pipe section – stress block for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦

(b) Tension part of Filled Pipe for calculating 𝑀𝑀𝑦𝑦

Figure B-2:Filled Pipe Section stress profile to compute 𝑴𝑴𝒚𝒚

Design of Members for Combined Forces 69

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

The concrete compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is then equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0
2(0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ) 1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥1
= � (𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 2 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

The steel compressive force, 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0 𝑥𝑥1 0 0
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 1 2 2 )2
3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 2 2
𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1
= (
� 𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥3
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 2 2
1 3 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥1
− � (𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 3 4 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

The steel tensile force, 𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 )
𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 1 3 𝑥𝑥4 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥4 1 3
= �− (𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥42 )2 + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥42 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 � + (𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3 3
2
−𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1
− 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
2 2 𝑥𝑥3
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 1 3 𝑥𝑥4 𝑥𝑥22 𝑥𝑥4 1 3
− �− (𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥42 )2 + 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥42 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 � + (𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2 3
2
−𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 −𝑥𝑥1
− 𝑥𝑥1 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 �� + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
2 2 𝑥𝑥2
where:
𝑥𝑥4 = −𝑥𝑥1 + (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 )
1 2 1
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑟𝑟 (2𝛽𝛽 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛽𝛽 ) − (𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡)2 (2𝛼𝛼 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛼𝛼 )
2 2
𝑥𝑥
𝛽𝛽 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � 4 � (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟)
𝑟𝑟
−1 � 𝑥𝑥4 �
𝛼𝛼 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟)
𝑟𝑟−𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡 = thickness of the steel pipe section
𝑟𝑟 = radius of the steel pipe section

The moment of concrete in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 , is equal to:

0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥24
2 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ )
( 𝑥𝑥1𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥22
2 2 )� 2 2
𝑥𝑥24 𝑥𝑥1
= � + − ( 2𝑥𝑥1 − 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
(𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥2
2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥1
− (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��
3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2

Design of Members for Combined Forces 70

Composite Column Design AISC 360-22 Design Using ANSI/AISC 360-22

The moment of steel in compression, 𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥−𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥3 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥2 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 ) (𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑀𝑀𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥 4 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥12 𝑥𝑥32 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥34 −𝑥𝑥1 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 −𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 2 −𝑥𝑥1
⎧ � 3+ + (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥32 )�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 3 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 �� ⎫
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 ⎪ 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥3 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3 ⎪
= 4 2 2 4 2
(𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥1 ) ⎨ 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥2 𝜋𝜋𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥1 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 −𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥 −𝑥𝑥1 ⎬
⎪− � + + (2𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑥𝑥22 )�𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥12 )2 − 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥12 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��⎪
⎩ 16 4 8 8 𝑥𝑥2 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2 ⎭

The moment of steel in tension, 𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 , is equal to:

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 )
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇𝑠𝑠 = 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
−𝑥𝑥1 0 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0 0
𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 ) 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥22 −𝑥𝑥 2 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (𝑥𝑥+𝑥𝑥1 )
(𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 ) (𝑥𝑥1 +𝑥𝑥4 )
= 2� � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑧𝑧|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − 2 � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )𝑧𝑧|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
−𝑥𝑥1 0 −𝑥𝑥1 0
𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥 2 2 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥 2 2
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
= � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − � � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) −𝑥𝑥1 0 (𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) −𝑥𝑥1 0
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥4 �𝑥𝑥32 −𝑥𝑥 2 2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥4
�𝑥𝑥 2 −𝑥𝑥 2
= � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑦𝑦|0 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − � (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥1 )2 𝑦𝑦|0 2 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) −𝑥𝑥1 (𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) −𝑥𝑥1
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥4
= � �𝑥𝑥 2 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥1 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥12 �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) −𝑥𝑥1
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥4
− � �𝑥𝑥 2 �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥1 �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥12 �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 � 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) −𝑥𝑥1
𝑥𝑥
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥34 𝑥𝑥 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥 4

= � (2𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥32 )�𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − (𝑥𝑥3 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )2 + 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥32 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 3 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ���

(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) 8 8 𝑥𝑥3 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥3 −𝑥𝑥
1
𝑥𝑥
2𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥24 𝑥𝑥 2𝑥𝑥1 2 3 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑥𝑥 4

− � (2𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥22 )�𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − (𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )2 + 𝑥𝑥12 � �𝑥𝑥22 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ��� + 𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
(𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 ) 8 8 𝑥𝑥2 3 2 2 𝑥𝑥2 −𝑥𝑥
1

where
𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠1 (𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 + 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐1 ) − 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠2 (𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥4 + 𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐2 )
2𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠3 𝛽𝛽 𝜋𝜋
𝑟𝑟 � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐� 𝛽𝛽 >
3(𝛽𝛽−𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠) 4
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐1 = � 𝜋𝜋
2( 2 4)
0.2𝑟𝑟𝛽𝛽 1 − 0.0619𝛽𝛽 + 0.0027𝛽𝛽 𝛽𝛽 ≤
4
1 2
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠1 = 𝑟𝑟 (2𝛽𝛽 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛽𝛽 )
2
𝑥𝑥
𝛽𝛽 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � 4 �
𝑟𝑟
2𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠3 𝛼𝛼 𝜋𝜋
(𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡) � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐� 𝛼𝛼 >
3(𝛼𝛼−𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠) 4
𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐2 = � 𝜋𝜋
0.2(𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡)𝛼𝛼 1 − 0.0619𝛼𝛼 + 0.0027𝛼𝛼 4 ) 𝛼𝛼 ≤
2( 2
4
1
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠2 = (𝑟𝑟 − 𝑡𝑡)2 (2𝛼𝛼 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2𝛼𝛼 )
2
𝑥𝑥4
𝛼𝛼 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 � �
𝑟𝑟−𝑡𝑡

Design of Members for Combined Forces 71

 Appendix C. Interactive Column Design

The Interactive Composite Column Design command is a powerful mode that allows the user to
review the design results for any composite column design and interactively revise the design
assumptions and immediately review the revised results.

Note that a design must have been run for the interactive design mode to be available. With the
design results displayed, right click on a frame object to display the Steel Stress Check
Information form for the member. Click on the Overwrites button to display the Design
Overwrites form, where the member section or other design parameters may be changed. Clicking
OK on this form results in an immediate updating of the results displayed on the Steel Stress
Check Information form.

Interactive Column Design 72

 Appendix D. Analysis Sections vs Design Sections

Analysis sections are those section properties used to analyze the model when an analysis is run
(refer to the program Help for information about running an analysis). The design section is
whatever section is used in the composite column design. It is possible for the last used analysis
section and the current design section to be different. For example, an analysis may be run using
a W18X35 beam, and then in the design, it may be found that a W16X31 beam worked. In that
case, the last used analysis section is the W18X35 and the current design section is the W16X31.
Before the design process is complete, verify that the last used analysis section and the current
design section are the same. Refer to the program Help for information about completing this
task.

The program keeps track of the analysis section and the design section separately. Note the
following about analysis and design sections:

• Assigning a frame section property assigns the section as both the analysis section and
the design section.
• Running an analysis always sets the analysis section to be the same as the current
design section.
• Assigning an Auto Select section list to a frame object initially sets the analysis and
design section to be the section in the list with the median weight.
• Unlocking a model deletes the design results, but it does not delete or change the design
section.
• Altering the Design Combinations in any way deletes the design results, but does not
delete or change the design section.
• Altering any of the composite column design preferences deletes the design results,
but does not delete or change the design section.

Analysis Sections vs Design Sections 73

 Bibliography

AISC, 2022a. ANSI/AISC 360-22: An American National Standard – Specification for

Structural Steel Building, American Institute of Steel Construction. One East Wacker
Drive, Suite 700, Chicago, Illinois, 60601. June 22.

AISC, 2022b. Commentary on the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, American
Institute of Steel Construction. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700, Chicago, Illinois,
60601. June 22.

AISC, 2022c. ANSI/AISC 341-22: Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
American Institute of Steel Construction. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700, Chicago,
Illinois, 60601. June 22.

ASCE, 2022. SEI/ASCE 7-22. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
ASCE Standard. American Society of Civil Engineers.

Boresi, A. P., 1985. Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley & Sons Inc. ISBN 0-
471-88392-1.

CSI, 2020. CSI Lateral Load Manual. Computers and Structures, Inc., 1995 University
Avenue, Berkeley, California, 94704.

IBC, 5. International Building Code, International Code Council, 4051 West Flossmoor
Road, Country Club Hills, Illinois, 60478. January.

Popov, E. P., 1990. Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice-Hall Inc. ISBN 0-

13279258-3.

Bibliography - 74
Bibliography

White, D.L. and J. F. Hajjar, 1991. “Application of Second-Order Elastic Analysis in

LRFD: Research to Practice,” Engineering Journal, ACI, Vol. 28, No. 4, pp. 133–148.

Wilson, E. L., 1965, "Structural Analysis of Axisymmetric Solids," AIAA Journal 3, 2269–
2274.

Bibliography - 75